Alaris Signature Gold - Service Manual

Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231
Technical Service Manual

Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion System

OPTIONS
SEC PRI
POWER
RUN
HOLD
Clear Enter
PRI SEC HLD OPT KVO HLD PRI SEC KVO OPT
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
1
POWER
RUN
HOLD
A B
A B
ml/hr ml/hr
SEC PRI
Clear Enter
OPT PRI HLD SEC KVO
1
RUN
HOLD
POWER
OPTIONS
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
ml/hr
This Technical Service Manual is subject to change without notification.
GENERAL CONTACT INFORMATION
ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.
10221 Wateridge Circle
San Diego, California 92121
Customer Advocacy - North America
Clinical and technical feedback.
Phone: (800) 854-7128, Ext. 7812
E-Mail: [email protected]
Technical Support - North America
Maintenance and service information support; troubleshooting.
United States:
Phone:
(858) 458-6003
(800) 854-7128, Ext. 6003
Canada:
Phone:
Eastern: (800) 908-9918
Western: (800) 908-9919
Customer Care - North America
Instrument return, service assistance, and order placement.
United States:
Phone:
(800) 482-4822
Canada:
Phone:
(800) 387-8309
Technical Support and Customer Care - UK
Maintenance and service information support.
Instrument return, service assistance, and order placement.
Customer Service:
Freephone: 0800 917 8776
Fax: 01256 330 860
Technical Support:
Freephone: 0800 389 6972
Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Chapter 1 - General Information
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Precaution Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.1 Nurse Call (7130/7230 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.2 Learn/Teach RS-232 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4.3 Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5 Alarms, Errors, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.5.1 Silencing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6 Battery Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.1 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.6.4 Battery Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.6.5 Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.6.6 Lower LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.6.7 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.6.8 Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.7 NiCad Battery Capacity Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.8 Dynamic Monitoring
System (DMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.9 Data Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.10 Trumpet and Start-Up Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Chapter 2A - Checkout and Configuration (Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08)
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
2.2 New Instrument Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
2.3 Configurable Options and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-1
2.4 Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-2
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-3
2.4.3 Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4
2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-4
2.4.5 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-5
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-6
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i
Signature Edition

Chapter 2A - Checkout and Configuration (Continued)
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-8
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-9
2.4.11 Setting Dynamic Monitoring
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10

2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-12
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name (Instrument ID Label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-13
2.4.14 Resistance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-14
2.4.15 Pressure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-15
2.4.16 Manual Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-16
2.5 Transferring Settings to Another Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-17
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-18
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-19
Chapter 2B - Checkout and Configuration (Software Version 2.78)
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
2.2 New Instrument Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
2.3 Configurable Options and Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-1
2.4 Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-2
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-3
2.4.3 Setting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4
2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-4
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-5
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-7
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-8
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-9
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-10
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11

2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name (Instrument ID Label) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-14
2.5 Transferring Settings to Another Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-15
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-16
2.6 Resistance Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-17
2.7 Pressure Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-18
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 3 - Preventive Maintenance
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Preventive Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Regular Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.3 Flow Stop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.2.7 Ground Current Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.8 Ground Resistance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.9 Battery Refresh Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.10 Reset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.11 Reset PM Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3 Storage and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Chapter 4 - Principles of Operation
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4 Main PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4.1 CPU Kernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4.2 Combo IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4.3 EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4.4 RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4.5 Flash EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.5 Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5.1 Battery Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5.2 AC Off-Line Switcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.5.3 Battery Charge Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.5.4 Refresh Cycle Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5.5 VAO Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5.6 AC Line Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5.7 System Power Source Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.5.8 Battery Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
iii
Signature Edition

Chapter 4 - Principles of Operation (Continued)
4.5.9 VMEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.10 Voltage Reference 4.1V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.5.11 System Current Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5.12 Always On Supply (+5VAO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5.13 System Switching Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5.14 VRAM Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.15 VPOS Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.5.17 System Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.5.18 Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.5.19 System Reset/Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.5.20 Lower LCD Display Backlight Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.6 Motor Drive/Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6.1 Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.6.2 Air-in-Line Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.6.3 Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.7 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7.1 Main Speaker Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.8 LED Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.9 Lower LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.10 Main LCD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.10.1 Main LCD Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.10.2 Graphic LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.11 Nurse Call Circuit (7130/7230 only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4.12 Panel Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.13 ECD Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Chapter 5 - Corrective Maintenance
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Disassembly/Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Removing Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 5 - Corrective Maintenance (Continued)
5.2.5 Removing Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.2.6 Removing Speaker Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.2.9 Removing Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.2.10 Removing LED and LCD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.2.11 Removing Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.2.13 Removing AIL Receiver (Button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.2.14 Removing Seal Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.2.15 Removing Mechanism Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.2.16 Removing Keypad Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.3 Test and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.1 Power-On Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.3 Mechanical Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.3.4 Pressure Verification and Calibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.5 Set Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.3.6 Test Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.3.8 Checking Pressure Calibration Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.4 Level of Testing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Diagnostics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2.1 Entering Diagnostics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.2.2 Setting Preventive Maintenance Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.4 Setting Time (and Date) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.2.7 Viewing DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.2.8 Setting ID Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.2.9 Viewing Battery and Total Run Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
v
Signature Edition

Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting (Continued)
6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.2.13 Testing Main LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.2.15 Testing Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.2.18 DAC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.2.19 Configuring Pressure System Auto Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Chapter 7 - Illustrated Part Breakdown
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.3 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.4 Ordering Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
List of Figures
1-1 Battery Refresh Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-2 Lower LCD Display Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3 Resistance Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-4 Pressure and Resistance Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2-1 Map of Configuration Screens (Software versions 4.06 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22A
2-2 Map of Configuration Screens (Software version 2.78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23B
3-1 Rate Accuracy Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2 Pressure Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
4-1 Main Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 COMBO IC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-3 Electrical Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Battery Manager Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-5 Battery Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-6 Main Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-7 System Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-8 System Reset/Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-9 Motor Drive Circuit, Phase 1(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-10 Motor and Mechanism Sensors Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-11 Air-in-Line Detector Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-12 Pressure Sensor Interface Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures (Continued)
4-13 User Interface Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-14 Main Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-15 Backup Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-16 Lower LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-17 Flow Sensor Interface Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
5-1 Instrument Assembly Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 View From Back of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 Alternate View From Back of Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4 Cap Handle Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-5 Hidden Case Screw in Battery Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-6 Case Screw and Pole Clamp Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-7 Separating Case Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-8 Locking Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-9a Torque Sequence (Single) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-9b Torque Sequence (Dual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-10a Removing Power Supply Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-10b Disconnecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-11 Rear Case ECD Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-12 RS-232 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-13 RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-14 Line Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-15 Speaker and Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-16 Pole Clamp Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-17 Retaining Ring Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-18a Rear Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-18b Front Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-18c Front Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-19 Removing Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-20 LED / LCD Modules and Snap Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-21 Mechanism Latch in Middle Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-22 Remove Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-23 Unlocking AIL Gear Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-24 AIL Transmitter in Open Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-25 AIL Transmitter in Closed Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5-26 Flat Edge of AIL Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-27 Faceplate Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-28 Mechanism Latch in Middle Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
vii
Signature Edition

List of Figures (Continued)
5-29 Apply RTV Under Edges of Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-30a Front Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-30b Front Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-31 Rear Case Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5-32 Mechanism Assembly Spring Location:
Between motor plate and clamp arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-33 Mechanism Assembly Spring Location:
Between back guide and clamp arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5-34 Detail of Proper Mechanism Spring Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-35 Spring Installation Tool Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-36 Leak Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5-37 Run-In Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-38 Transducer Pot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
6-1 Map of Diagnostic Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
7-1 Power Cord Wrap Kit (Item 403) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-2a Case Assembly, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-2b Case Assembly, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-3a Front Case Assembly, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3b Front Case Assembly, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-4 Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5a Rear Case Assembly, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-5b Rear Case Assembly, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-7 Label / Literature Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
List of Tables
1-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 Battery Trip Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-3 Abbreviations, Acronyms, Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
2-1 Record of Configured Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20A
2-2 Drug List (7130/7230 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6B
2-3 Record of Configured Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20B
2-4 Drug List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22B
3-1 PM Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
4-1 Motor Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
5-1 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Tables (Continued)
5-2 Level of Testing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
6-1 Technical Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 Battery Manager Error Codes (not in Alarm History) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
7-1 Other Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 Front Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-4 Mechanism Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5 Rear Case Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7-7 Label / Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-8 Packing Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
ix
Signature Edition

x
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Signature Edition

THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
1
G
E
N
E
R
A
L
I
N
F
O
R
M
A
T
I
O
N
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual covers Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion Systems, with software

versions 2.78, 4.06 and 4.08. It is used in
conjunction with an applicable Signature
Edition
GOLD Infusion System Directions

for Use (DFU).
This manual contains instructions for
maintenance, repair, and configuration of
the instrument. It is intended for personnel
experienced in the analysis,
troubleshooting, and repair of analog/digital
microprocessor-based electronic
equipment.
If the instrument requires service while
under warranty, it is to be serviced only by
ALARIS Medical Systems authorized
service personnel. Refer to the Service
Information and Warranty sections of the
applicable Signature Edition
GOLD
Infusion System DFU.
The Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion
System includes:
Single-Channel, Models 7130/7131
Dual-Channel, Models 7230/7231
AccuSlide
Flow Regulator
administration sets
GOLD Infusion
System series includes the following
configurations:
7130B, 7130D, 7130E
7131A, 7131B
7230B, 7230D, 7230E
7231A, 7231B
Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1
Do not use sharp objects (pens, pencils, etc.)
to activate switches, as this will damage the
keypad.
Any attempt to service an ALARIS Medical
Systems instrument by anyone other than an
authorized ALARIS Medical Systems Service
Representative while the instrument is under
warranty may invalidate the warranty.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Signature Edition

1.1 INTRODUCTION (Continued)
7130/7131 and 7230/7231 Series:
is a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz instruments
family that supports both single and dual
channel fluid delivery
features user-interactive software
displays prompts, alarms and alert
messages, and troubleshooting
information on main LCD display
can be configured to specific operational
requirements
allows upgrades for future instrument
enhancements
has been designed to interface with
accessory equipment.
7131/7231 Series key differences from
7130/7230 Series are:
HARDWARE
The 7131/7231 Series is labeled for
220V with two power cord options and
has isolated RS-232 Board, potential
equalization (PE) connector, and drop
sensor board installed.
There is no Nurse Call option.
Keypads, other than English, have
symbols instead of words.
SOFTWARE
The 7131/7231 Series has a drug list
only if the software version is 4.08 or
higher and profiles are enabled. Some
defaults are different in configuration
mode and there are several languages to
choose from in version 2.78.
Refer to the applicable Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion System DFU for complete

setup and operation information.
1.2 PRECAUTION DEFINITIONS
A is an alert to a potential
hazard which could result in serious
personal injury and/or instrument damage if
proper procedures are not followed.
A is an alert to a potential
hazard which could result in minor personal
injury and/or instrument damage if proper
procedures are not followed.
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to Table 1-1.
1.4 ACCESSORIES
Accessory items are available for use with
the instrument. These items are described
in the following paragraphs.
1.4.1 Nurse Call (7130/7230 only)
All instruments are equipped with the nurse
call feature. Alarms and some alerts from
the instrument will be relayed to the facilitys
existing nurse call system. No operating
features of the instrument are changed and
it will alarm with or without the nurse call.
The only additional item needed is a cable
with a 9-pin to mono phone jack (ALARIS
P/N 136111).
1.4.2 Learn/Teach RS-232 Cable
This is a standard commercially available
9-pin Null Modem RS-232 cable (ALARIS
P/N 133450). The Learn/Teach RS-232
cable is used to connect two instruments for
the purpose of transferring (downloading)
configuration data from/to another
instrument.
NOTE: Guardrails
Safety Software data

sets cannot be transferred via the
Learn/Teach function. They must be
downloaded directly from a PC.
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-2
WARNING
CAUTION
Signature Edition

GENERAL INFORMATION
1-3
Signature Edition

Administration Sets: Use only ALARIS Medical Systems
72 Series administration sets. All

disposable IV set and IV set accessory models are defined on a separate
card.
Air-in-Line Accuracy:
Alarms: Accumulated Air in
Line
Air in Line
Battery Depleted
Channel
Malfunction
Computer Link
Failure
Flow Sensor
Unplugged
Hold Time
Exceeded
Instrument
Malfunction
Key Stuck
Latch Open
No Upstream Flow
Detected
Occlusion
Downstream
Occlusion Upstream
Primary Flow
Detection During
Secondary
Set Out
Set Up Time
Exceeded
Altitude: Operating Altitude: -500 ft. (-150m) to 7,500 ft. (2285m)
Battery: Rechargeable nickel-cadmium (NiCad). Use only NiCad 12V, 1.8
ampere-hour (Ah) (minimum) batteries. A single channel instrument will
operate for 4 hours nominal and a dual channel instrument will operate
for 3 hours nominal, under the following conditions:
new, fully-charged battery
ambient room temperature 73 7F (23 4C)
resistance monitoring modes
rate: 100 mL/h on a single channel instrument and 50 mL/h on each
channel of a dual channel instrument.
Battery run time is affected by operating mode, rate, monitoring options,
and back pressure.
Table 1-1. Specifications
Configured Threshold Air Volume Detection Range
50L 15L - 85L
100L 35L - 140L
200L 100L - 235L
500L 275L - 565L
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-4
Table 1-1. Specifications (Continued)
Bolus Volume Limits:
NOTE: When the occlusion alarm pressure limit is set to the maximum
threshold setting, the maximum infusion pressure generated into a hard
occlusion at 25 mL/h is 11.63.9 psi. Testing performed using IV set
Model 72003, at 684F (202C).
Case: Impact and flame resistant plastic.
Critical Volume: Maximum incremental volume in case of single point failure will not
exceed 1.0 mL at 999.9 mL/h.
Dimensions (Nominal): 7130/7131 7230/7231
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
Power Cord
without pole clamp
without power cord
7.6 in/19.3 cm
8.6 in/21.8 cm
5.0 in/12.7 cm
6.6 lbs/3.0 kg
10 ft/3 m
10.7 in/26.7 cm
8.6 in/21.8 cm
5.0 in/12.7 cm
8.4 lbs/3.8 kg
10 ft/3 m
Environmental Conditions: Operating Storage/Transport
Temperature Range
Relative Humidity
Atmospheric Pressure
5 to 40C
(41 to 104F)
20 to 90%
Non-condensing
700 to 1060 hPa
-40 to 60C
(-40 to 104F)
5 to 95%
Non-condensing
500 to 1060 hPa
Fluid Ingress Rating: Drip proof IPX1
Time Bolus Volume
Released Upon Correcting
Downstream Occlusion
(mL)
Monitoring Options
Pressure
Resistance and
High Resistance
Threshold Settings
25
mmHg
600
mmHg
100%
25 mmHg
100%
600 mmHg
1 mL/h
Maximum 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Typical <0.1 0.3 <0.1 <0.1
25 mL/h
Maximum 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Typical <0.1 0.3 <0.1 <0.1
Signature Edition

GENERAL INFORMATION
1-5
Signature Edition

Ground Current Leakage: Electrical leakage current, enclosure: <100 microamperes
Electrical leakage current, patient: <10 microamperes
Log Capacity: Software version 2.78:
2000 Event History Log
Software version 4.06/4.08:
300 Continuous Quality Improvement (CQI)
1500 Event History Log
Maximum Infusion Pressure: 16 psi
NOTE: Testing performed per proposed standard IEC 601-2-24 using
IVAC
IV sets.
Maximum Time to Alarm:
NOTE: When the occlusion alarm pressure limit is set to the
maximum threshold setting, the maximum infusion pressure
generated into a hard occlusion at 25 mL/h is 11.63.9 psi. Testing
was performed using IV set Model 72003, at 684F (202C).
Memory: 4.06 and higher: Maintains infusion perimeters indefinitely until the
instrument is reprogrammed.
2.78: Interrupted secondary or advanced operating modes retain special
program settings up to 6 hours. Resistance/pressure trending
information is retained for 6 hours.
Mode of Operation: Continuous
Number of Instruments
per Pole: 3 (713X), 2 (723X), single pole, weighted base, 5 legs.
Time to Detect
Downstream
Occlusion (minutes)
Monitoring Options
Pressure
Resistance and
High Resistance
Threshold Settings
25
mmHg
600
mmHg
100%
25 mmHg
100%
25 mmHg
1 mL/h
Maximum 2 75 2 7
Typical 0.6 30 0.6 4
25 mL/h
Maximum 1 25 1 3
Typical 0.1 1 1.0 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-6
Signature Edition

Occlusion Alarm Pressure: 12 4 psi maximum
Parts per mL: Precision Flow 3600 steps to deliver 1 mL Pressure Mode (rate < 50
mL/h). All other occlusion monitoring options 1150 steps to deliver 1 mL
(Cal # = 0.0) steps will vary with Cal #.
Power Requirements: 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz (40 W), 3-wire grounded system. Class 1 with
internal power source.
Rate Accuracy: For rates greater than 1 mL/h, up to 999.9 mL/h: 5%, 95% of the time
with 95% confidence, under the conditions listed below.
For rates equal to or less than 1 mL/h: 6.5%, 95% of the time with 95%
confidence, under the conditions listed below.
Variations of head height, back pressure, time, monitoring mode option,
instrument tilt, or any combination of these, may affect rate accuracy.
Factors that can influence head height and back pressure are: IV set
configuration, IV solution viscosity and IV solution temperature. Back
pressure may also be affected by type of catheter.
Rate Range: 0.1 to 999.9 mL/h in 0.1 mL/h increments (primary)
0.1 to 270.0 mL/h in 0.1 mL/h increments (secondary)
RFI: Tolerance < 10 V/m across frequency range.
Temperature: Operating above 30C, for extended periods will reduce battery life.
Volume to Be Infused Range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL in 0.1 mL increments (primary and dose rate)
0.1 to 999.9 mL in 0.1 mL increments (secondary and loading dose)
0.1 to 999.9 mL per step in 0.1 mL increments (multi-step)
0.1 to 999.9 mL per dose in 0.1 mL increments (multi-dose)
WARNINGS (Alerts): Battery Low Load Dose Complete
Checking Line Multi-Step Complete
Complete Entry Resistance Alert
Computer Control Released Secondary Complete
Dose Complete VTBI = 0
Infusion in KVO
CAUTION
NOTE: The Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion System has been assessed and complies with the following
Technical Standards: IEC 60601-1 / BS 5724, including amendments A1 and A2; IEC 60601-2-24; CISPR
11, Group 1, Class B Emissions; IEC 60601-1-2.
Infusion rate range:
0.1 to 999.9 mL/h
Head height: 24 1 in.
(61 2.5 cm)
Environment temperature:
688F (204C)
Back pressure: 0 psi.
Test solution: distilled water Set Model: 72003
Needle: 18 gauge Minimum collection volume: 6 mL
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-7
Signature Edition

1.4 ACCESSORIES (Continued)
1.4.3 Flow Sensor
Flow sensor capability is available with an
upgrade kit for the 7130/7230 (refer to the
Illustrated Parts Breakdown chapter). For
7131/7231, all that is needed is a flow
sensor.
The flow sensor attaches to the
administration set's drip chamber. It detects
an empty solution container and verifies
fluid flow. When installed, it will allow VTBI
to be turned off. The flow sensor will not
see drops falling if the drip chamber is tilted
more than 24.
1.5 ALARMS, ERRORS, MESSAGES
Alarm messages are displayed on the Main
Display. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition
GOLD Infusion System DFU for

detailed information.
1.5.1 Silencing Alarms
All alarms can be temporarily silenced by
pressing the Silence Key.
1.6 BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
This section contains general information on
the battery management system. Included
is information on how the Battery Manager
monitors and maintains the battery, controls
the power on/off for the rest of the
instrument, and provides support functions
for the main processor. Refer to the
Principles of Operation chapter for more
detailed functional descriptions.
The battery management system consists of
the Battery Manager IC and various sensors
and signal processing circuits. The Battery
Manager IC (Rev. 3.06) is a custom-
programmed microcontroller that performs
the following functions:
Controls battery charger
Provides a battery status "battery gauge"
Monitors voltage and temperature of
battery
Controls instrument power source (on/off
function)
Drives Lower LCD Display
(refer to Figure 1-2)
Includes a relative-time clock
The Battery Manager communicates with
the main processor via a serial data
channel. The main processor issues
commands to the Battery Manager which
then responds with status information and
data using this channel.
1.6.1 Fan
The internal fan is used for cooling, mainly
to help prolong battery life. It is a ball-
bearing, brushless DC fan. The fan is
always on when the battery is charging with
"Fast" or "Top-up" charge. The fan will go
on any time battery temperature is over
22C.
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process
The battery is a ten-cell (1.2V per cell), high
capacity nickel-cadmium type rated at
12 volts and 1.8 amp-hours (with a minimum
of 500 charge cycles).
The battery pack (10 to 18V) has a built-in
temperature sensor which allows the Battery
Manager to monitor the temperature of the
battery. The pack also includes a
temperature-limiting thermostat which opens
the circuit if the battery temperature gets too
hot and closes again when the temperature
returns to normal.
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-8
Signature Edition

(Continued)
1.6.2 Battery and Charging Process
(Continued)
The battery charge circuit charges the
battery with a constant current of 1 ampere
whenever the Battery Manager turns the
charger on. The Battery Manager regulates
average charge current by turning the
charger on and off with the appropriate duty
ratio. The battery charge cycle consists of
four modes; fast charge, top-up charge, float
charge, and hot charge.
Fast Charge: Fast charge is initiated
whenever the battery is less than 36C,
and has been discharged by more than
200 Ampere-seconds through actual use
or self discharge. Leaving the instrument
unplugged for a day would cause about
200 Ampere-seconds of self discharge.
The charge current is a continuous
1 Ampere. The end of a fast charge is
detected when the temperature of the
battery rises 7C above its temperature
at start of charge and is at least 30C, or
when the battery voltage declines by
192mV below its peak value, or total
charge time exceeds 3.2 hours. Refer to
Battery Charge Regulator section in the
Principles of Operation chapter for
further details.
Top-Up Charge: The top-up charge
phase begins at the end of the fast
charge phase and finishes adding the
last few percent of charge to the battery
and balances individual cell charges.
This phase charges at an average rate of
180 mA (1 A for 0.9 seconds every 5
seconds) for 180 minutes. At that time,
the instrument will go into float charge
mode.
The charger will suspend top-up if the
battery temperature exceeds 37C. The
time spent to cool down to below 37C is
in addition to the 180 minutes top-up
charge time. If top-up cool down time
exceeds 5 1/2 hours, the instrument will
go into float charge mode.
Float Charge: The float charge phase
begins at the end of the top-up phase
and helps maintain a fully charged
battery. This phase charges at an
average rate of 40 mA (1A for 0.2
seconds every 5 seconds). The fan
remains on or turns on when battery
temperature exceeds 22C.
Hot Charge: The hot charge mode occurs
when the instrument determines that the
battery is >36C (normally due to
ambient temperature being >27C) to
allow a charge after waiting 3 hours for it
to cool down. Hot charge mode charges
at an average rate of 180 mA (1A for 0.9
seconds every 5 seconds) for a total
charge time of 18 hours. If the battery
temperature exceeds 43C, the charging
is turned off until the temperature falls
below 43C.
Note that the cool down time is in
addition to the 18-hour charge time. The
float charge cycle begins at the end of
the hot charge cycle.
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle
A battery refresh cycle performs a full
charge, discharge, and recharge to
condition and measure the capacity of the
battery. This refresh results in a new
"Measured Capacity" in the battery
diagnostics and can be used to judge the
condition of the battery.
Battery Voltage Instrument Response
12.0V (Single)
12.1V (Dual)
One tick mark left on gauge
Instrument continues to function
Warning tone activated
Low battery warning
11.45V Instrument does not pump
Constant alarm
Low battery alarm (depletion)
10.25V 1 minute or longer (nominal 5
min.) after low battery alarm
Backup speaker activated
Instrument shutdown (5 min.
after alarm)
9.75V No AC power applied
Battery disconnected from
circuit by shutdown signal
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-9
Signature Edition

(Continued)
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle (Continued)
The refresh cycle must be initiated
manually, either by disconnecting/
reconnecting the battery or by loading 0.0
Ah as the rated capacity in the battery
diagnostics page. After the zero rated
capacity is loaded and the OK soft key is
pressed, the original rated capacity must be
reloaded to preserve the battery gauge.
The empty ("E") icon will flash during the
discharge part of the refresh cycle (see
Figure 1-1). Important: The AC power must
remain connected and uninterrupted during
the discharge cycle. If the AC power is
removed during this cycle, the discharge
cycle will be terminated and another refresh
cycle will have to be initiated. The time for
complete refresh is dependent upon battery
Figure 1-1. Battery Refresh Cycle
Table 1-2. Battery Trip Points
Refresh cycle starts
E blinks
Cycle ends
11.45 Volts
Fast Fast
Cool* Cool*
Top-Up* Top-Up*
Float Discharge
* Cool and Top-Up portions of cycle will vary with
temperature. The complete cycle could last 24 hours if
instrument turned on with the Fan running most of the time.
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-10
(Continued)
1.6.3 Refresh Cycle (Continued)
temperature and takes an average of 20
hours to complete (refer to Figure 1-1).
Two ways to initiate a manual refresh cycle
are:
Disconnect from AC, unplug battery, and
then press power switch. Lower LCD
will go blank. Reconnect battery and
then reconnect instrument to AC.
Enter Diagnostics Mode, go to page D2,
Select Battery Status, and enter 0.0 Ah
for battery-rated capacity. Press Enter
and ok. Turn instrument off and back on,
and then reconnect to AC. Once the fan
turns on (indicating start of a refresh
cycle), return to page D2 and reset
battery rated capacity to 1.3 Ah.
1.6.4 Battery Gauge
The battery gauge provides an indication of
the approximate amount of charge
remaining on the battery. It will usually
indicate less charge than is actually
available with a new battery. This is
displayed in a bar graph format on the
lower LCD Display and is active as long as
the battery is connected to the instrument.
(Refer to Figure 1-2, Lower LCD Display
Layout.)
The battery gauge circuitry measures the
current flow into and out of the battery and
maintains a record of the state of charge of
the battery. This record is reset each time
the instrument completes a full refresh
cycle. The battery gauge uses this record,
together with a measurement of the present
power requirements of the instrument, to
estimate the charge available on battery
power at the current infusion rate.
NOTES:
The instrument label and battery gauge
are always displayed, even when the
instrument is turned off; however, the
battery gauge does not represent the
battery charge remaining when the
instrument is turned off.
To ensure a more accurate battery gauge
reading, review the battery gauge five
minutes after starting an infusion. The
gauge updates for each program change
while infusing. Battery run time may be
affected by the operating mode, rate,
monitoring options and back pressure.
1.6.5 Power On/Off
The Battery Manager provides the interface
between the power on/off switch(es) and
the main processor. When the instrument
is off, the Battery Manager interprets either
power switch as a turn on command and
applies power to the rest of the instrument,
informing the main processor which switch
was pressed. Once power is on, further
presses of a power switch are passed on to
the main processor which determines the
appropriate response under the existing
conditions. If the response is to turn the
power off, the main processor requests that
the Battery Manager remove power from
the rest of the instrument.
If an error has been detected which causes
the watchdog to be in alarm, pushing the
power switch (or for dual channel
instruments, either power switch)
immediately causes the power to be turned
off, without intervention by the Battery
Manager.
Signature Edition

GENERAL INFORMATION
1-11
Signature Edition

(Continued)
1.6.6 Lower LCD Display
The Battery Manager also contains the
driver for the Lower LCD Display. In addition
to the battery gauge, this display contains a
four-character alphanumeric "configuration"
display and several icons. The information
for these other displays is controlled by the
main processor and is communicated to the
Battery Manager through the serial channel.
The Battery Manager also uses the four-
character display to indicate errors detected
in the Battery Manager system itself.
1.6.7 Clock
The Battery Manager provides a "relative
time" clock which the main processor can
set and read. This clock consists of a 32-bit
counter which is incremented once a
second under all conditions. The main
processor uses this counter as a means of
determining elapsed time even when power
has been turned off. The clock is used to
compensate for normal battery capacity
degradation over time.
1.6.8 Battery Maintenance
Several features have been included in the
Battery Manager to help properly maintain
the battery.
A battery capacity measurement is
available in diagnostic mode.
A special circuit removes all load from
battery when voltage falls too low,
preventing damage from over discharge
due to long-term storage.
NiCad batteries can be stored indefinitely
with no load but will self-discharge from a
charged state in about 100 days. This does
not damage the battery as it would if it were
a lead acid-type battery. Connect
instrument to AC to recharge batteries.
MNTR
GOLD
Figure 1-2. Lower LCD Display Layout
Use only batteries approved by ALARIS
Medical Systems, due to Battery
Manager requirements and the
thermostat contained in the battery
assembly. If the instrument has been in
storage, connect it to AC power before
turning it on. Usually one refresh cycle
is sufficient to restore battery capacity.
If necessary, repeat the procedure at
24-hour intervals, 2 or 3 times, to
increase capacity.
Battery replacement should be
performed by qualified service
personnel while instrument is not in use.
DO NOT open, incinerate or short circuit
the battery. Worn-out batteries must be
disposed of properly, according to local
regulations.
CAUTIONS
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-12
(Continued)
1.6.8 Battery Maintenance (Continued)
NOTE: If under load (inside instrument), the
maximum storage time would be about 130
days before electrolyte extrusion occurs past
the battery seal.
If the battery exhibits short run times, a
reconditioning procedure can be used:
1. Disconnect battery and AC
2. Press On/Off switch and verify lower
LCD goes blank.
3. Reconnect battery.
4. Reconnect instrument to AC. A refresh
cycle will be initiated.
5. Repeat this procedure at 24-hour
intervals, 2 or 3 times, to increase
capacity or use a battery conditioner.
1.7 NICAD BATTERY CAPACITY
INFORMATION
All batteries have specific conditions under
which they are guaranteed to meet their
published specifications. Deviations from
these conditions typically result in a
reduction of available capacity.
Manufacturers of NiCad batteries rate
capacities, usually expressed in Ah, based
on a specified "ideal" charge and discharge
condition, as well as the use of a "new"
battery. Battery manufacturers do not use
the calendar year for battery date codes.
The battery date code year starts on
September 1. The first two digits of the date
code are for the year and the last two digits
are for the week of the year (for example,
date code 0411 = the year 2004 and the
eleventh week from September 1).
An ideal charge cycle starts with a fully
discharged battery charged at C/10 (C is the
rated capacity in Ah) constant current for 15
hours while at room temperature. For
instance, a 1.8Ah battery would be charged
for 15 hours at 180mA constant current with
a room temperature of 23C.
The ideal discharge starts with a fully
charged battery under a C/5 constant
current load at room temperature,
discharging to a cell voltage of 0.9V. The
rated capacity is then calculated as the time
to discharge divided by 5. Again, a 1.8Ah
cell would be discharged at 360mA constant
current and not reach 0.9V for at least 5
hours. Note that a given battery type has
different capacities based on the load. For
instance, a battery rated at 1.8Ah at a
360mA load may have only 1.6Ah at a
1600mA load.
As can be seen from the preceding ideal
conditions, there are many conditions which
can affect the battery capacity. The
following conditions have the most practical
impact on battery capacity delivered in this
instrument.
Temperature During Charge:
As the effective ambient temperature of
the battery increases, the amount of
charge that the battery will accept is
decreased. At an ambient temperature of
35C, an enclosed battery will
temporarily accept only about 90% of the
charge it would otherwise accept at
23C. Because the batteries are internal
to the instrument case and the instrument
itself generates heat, the batteries will be
exposed to temperatures above room
temperature. Some of the ways the
instrument limits the temperatures that
the battery sees include forcing air
across it (an internal fan) and turning off
the charger when the battery temperature
gets too high.
Signature Edition

GENERAL INFORMATION
1-13
Signature Edition

INFORMATION (Continued)
Cycle Life and Aging:
As batteries get older and go through
many charge/discharge cycles, batteries
"wear out," in that the chemicals and
materials used to construct the cell break
down. The way the instrument deals with
this is to assume that a battery will
continually reduce capacity at a rate
equivalent to 30% over 4 years, and
continually reduce capacity at a rate
equivalent to 30% per 200 full charge
cycles. These calculated values are
used to reduce the displayed runtime on
the battery gauge.
Partial Discharge/Charge:
When a battery is partially discharged,
then charged for less than the full time,
differences between individual cell
capacities result in cells completing
charge at different times. If the full
charge sequence is not then completed,
the cell "mismatch" becomes
progressively greater. This is viewed by
the user as low apparent runtimes and
premature low battery warning and
alarms.
The problem is cumulative in that the
mismatch increases for every partial
cycle. The lowered capacity is not
permanent, but may require 2-3 full
charge cycles to recover. The way the
instrument deals with this is to reduce the
displayed runtime based on a limited
history of partial cycles.
Charge Rate:
The ideal charge rate requires 15 hours
to get to full charge, which is undesirable
from the user's perspective. The
instrument provides a multiphase charge
cycle which results in about 80% capacity
in the first 2 hours after fast charge. The
next charge phase, top-up, is designed to
finish the charge and to bring all
individual cells to the fully charged state,
essentially rematching them. Refer to
Battery and Charging Process section
in this chapter for Fast Charge and
Top-up Charge information. If the
topup charge is not completed, then the
cell mismatch is not reduced and the
cumulative capacity reduction occurs.
Top-up is a 3-hour charge, but the
elapsed time to complete it may be over
5 hours, as the charger is turned on and
off to keep the battery cool during that
time.
Battery Alarm Voltage:
The battery alarm voltage is the voltage
at which the instrument stops operating
and generates an alarm indicating the
instrument needs to be connected to AC
power. As noted in the ideal discharge
condition, the end of discharge is
determined by 0.9V/cell.
Under perfect conditions, a battery of 10
cells connected in series would reach the
end of discharge at 9.0V; however, cells
are not perfectly matched so some will
reach 0.9V before others. The problem
occurs when a cell in series with other
cells can go below 0.9V and actually can
go into cell reversal, which permanently
damages the particular cell. On the other
hand, increasing the alarm voltage to
compensate for imperfectly matched cells
results in reduced runtimes with available
capacity.
INFORMATION (Continued)
The user sees this as premature low
battery warnings and alarms. The way
the instrument deals with this is to
increase the alarm voltage to guarantee
the battery is not damaged and to reduce
the assumed capacity to below that
printed on the battery. The battery gauge
is intended to show the minimum run
time left on the battery taking all these
factors into account.
NOTE: In the event ALARIS Medical Systems
provides different battery packs in the future,
the replacement battery may have a different
rated capacity. Therefore, the Battery
Manager of the instrument needs to know that
a new battery has been added and the rated
capacity has changed. Refer to the
Removing Battery section of Corrective
Maintenance chapter and the Changing
Rated Capacity of Battery section of
Troubleshooting chapter.
1.8 DYNAMIC MONITORING
SYSTEM
(DMS)
The following is general information
regarding the Dynamic Monitoring
System.
In order for fluid to move through the
administration set, a pressure difference
(gradient) must exist. In a gravity setup, this
is done by head height. In a pump, the
instrument will develop pressure to
overcome downstream effects on fluid flow.
The fundamental concept behind the
Dynamic Monitoring
System is that the

resistance to fluid flow from the mechanism
to the patient's infusion site can be
measured. This is done by intentionally
varying the flow rate while monitoring the
resulting changes in fluid pressure (refer to
Figure 1-3 "Resistance Graph"). Signal
processing of the pressure and flow data
can then produce the fluid impedance value.
Such measurements can be made
continuously at short intervals and be
independent of the selected rate. Head
height and resulting pressure variations,
likewise, will not affect the measurement.
When a complete occlusion occurs, the
resistive part of the fluid impedance is very
large (theoretically infinite). Elevated
resistances due to clotting, clogged filters,
partial occlusions or infiltrations can be
measured.
The Dynamic Monitoring
System provides
a means to measure the mechanical
properties of the downstream flow path.
Figure 1-3. Resistance Graph
Pressure =
Effect when a force is against a restriction.
Resistance =
Caused when impediment to fluid flow
occurs.
Resistance = Change in Pressure (P)
Change in Flow ( F)
Refer to Figure 1-4 "Pressure and Resistance
Graph".
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-14
Signature Edition

F Nominal
0
FLOW (cause)
RATE HI
RATE LOW
SET RATE
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

(
r
e
s
u
l
t
)
P
F
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-15
Signature Edition

1.8 DYNAMIC MONITORING
SYSTEM
(DMS) (Continued)
Features include:
Alarm setting is based on dynamic
system impedance (pressure changes,
not absolute pressure).
Detection of complete occlusions.
Reduced nuisance alarms by minimizing
artifact effects such as head height and
patient movement.
AutoRestartPlus feature allows
instrument to automatically continue
operation if an occlusion is cleared within
self-check period (40 seconds). A
warning tone and Checking Line
message will occur for up to 40 seconds.
The feature can be turned off (set
restarts to zero), or number of restarts
may be set from 1 to 9.
NOTES:
The restart counter is reset whenever
Run/Hold is pressed, the instrument or
channel is turned off or an alarm occurs.
When infusion is started, the resistance
may be other than 0%, depending on
solution viscosity, catheter/tubing size and
filters.
Resistance Alert provides an early
warning of slow or gradual changes in
resistance of IV line/site. Resistance Alert
marker can be set from 5 to 100%. It
allows resistance to be monitored and
provides a tone every 30 seconds if
percent resistance exceeds resistance
alert mark.
Resistance display may be turned off. If
off, system continues to monitor
downstream resistance and alarm
appropriately.
Figure 1-4. Pressure and Resistance Graph
Pressure rise is quite small with site
complication, especially with low flow rates.
Resistance rises dramatically with site
complication.
OCCLUSION
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

m
m
H
g
IN PRESSURE
TIME
0
300
600
OCCLUSION
IN PRESSURE
TIME
F
L
U
I
D

O
H
M
S

m
m
H
g
/
L
i
t
e
r
/
H
r
100%
0
50%
75%
GENERAL INFORMATION
Signature Edition

1-16
1.9 DATA COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION
The instrument has built-in remote
monitoring capability. This allows features
and their data to be monitored by a
computer, providing a means to create
advanced clinical systems. A separate
manual on data communications is available
and organized to support technical
personnel with a wide range of experience
and needs. The separate manual includes:
General Information: Includes phone
number for technical support.
Operation: Instrument's communications
modes, controls, indicators, and
procedures from user's point of view.
Instrument Setup: How to set the baud
rate, enable or disable computer
monitoring, and other parameters.
Electrical Interfacing: RS-232
background information, connectors and
recommended wiring for common
computers.
Communications Protocol: Inquiry,
response, and command codes, data
formats, message sequences, and error
detection.
1.10 TRUMPET AND START-UP CURVES
GOLD Infusion System DFU.

GENERAL INFORMATION
Signature Edition
GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

1-17
Table 1-3. Abbreviations, Acronyms, Symbols
Various abbreviations, acronyms and symbols are used throughout this manual. The following are those that are
not commonly known or easily recognized.
* "active Low" logic signal VAO voltage alternating oscillator
AlL air-in-line VBKUP voltage backup
DFU directions for use VNEG negative voltage
DS display VMEAS voltage measured
ECD empty container detection VMOTOR voltage to motor
F fuse VPOS positive voltage
FB ferrite bead VRAW voltage raw (unregulated voltage)
H hexadecimal VTBI volume to be infused
KVO keep vein open VTHRES voltage threashold
PM preventive maintenance WD watchdog
PR power regulator WDI watchdog input
PRI/SEC primary to secondary WDO watchdog output
SCU serial control unit
GENERAL INFORMATION
Signature Edition
GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

1-18
THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
2
A
C
H
E
C
K
O
U
T
&

C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
CHAPTER 2A CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Versions 4.06 and 4.08
Signature Edition

2A-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the initial setup and
configuration of an instrument with software
versions 4.06 and 4.08.
2.2 NEW INSTRUMENT CHECKOUT
Refer to the instrument's Directions For Use
(DFU) for instructions regarding unpacking
and setting up the instrument for the first
time.
When turning on the instrument, verify the
instrument beeps and that all display LED
segments flash. This confirms that the
instrument has performed its self test and is
operating correctly. During operation, the
instrument continually performs a self test,
and will alarm and display a message if it
detects an internal malfunction.
Contact ALARIS Medical Systems
authorized service personnel if the
instrument has physical damage, fails to
satisfactorily pass startup sequence, fails a
self test or continues to alarm.
For new instrument checkout refer to the
GOLD
Infusion System DFU.
2.3 CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS AND
DEFAULTS
A hospital/facility biomedical technician has
the capability to set all configuration
parameters to their startup defaults in a
single operation. The terms "configuration
parameters" and "programmable features"
are interchangeable and have the same
meaning. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition

more information.
Keep latch closed when instrument is not in use.
CAUTION
Should an instrument be jarred severely or
dropped, remove it from use immediately. It
should be thoroughly tested and inspected by
qualified service personnel to ensure proper
function prior to reuse.
CAUTION
CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
2A-2
Signature Edition

2.4 CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
When an instruments configuration is
changed, the configuration name
should also be changed in order to
document the new parameter settings.
The intent of the configuration name is
to have only one set of parameters for
each alpha-numeric code. Refer to
Pop-Up Displays section.
Powering down in configuration mode
during an alarm or error will NOT save
any configuration changes.
The configuration procedure is for use by
qualified service personnel only. The
configuration mode is intended for
programming the technical and clinical
features in accordance with current
procedures and practices.
Table 2-1, Record of Configured
Instruments, can be reproduced and used
to record and track instrument
configuration settings.
A map of all the configuration screens is
located at the end of this chapter (Figure
2-1).
Software version 2.78 is not Guardrails
Safety Software compatible and the

configuration mode is different. Refer to
Chapter 2 for Software Version 2.78 for
detailed calibration information.
The configuration mode for versions 4.06
and 4.08 are identical except when
Profiles is enabled. When Profiles is
enabled, the only configuration settings
that can be changed in version 4.08 are
Regional Settings, Profiles, Computer Link
WARNINGS
and Optional Features, because the
Guardrails
Safety Software profile

overrides every other setting in the
configuration mode.
NOTES:
Pressing a soft key at the side of the Main
Display the first time, selects it for editing.
Some features are edited by subsequent
presses of the soft key to cycle through
available options. Other features are
edited by means of the numeric keypad
entry.
Pressing undo undoes any edits made to
that page, and stays on the page.
Pressing ok accepts all information on the
page, and returns to menu page.
Pressing the POWER switch after editing
a configurable item evokes an invalid key
tone and a message to "ok entry". ok
must be selected to accept the edit before
the instrument can be powered off.
The page number is located in the upper-
right corner of the display.
The instruments configuration information
is not lost when disconnected from AC
power. However, error history and infusion
program settings may be lost. If this
information is to be saved, be sure to record
it before disconnecting power.
CAUTION
(Continued)
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode
The instrument must be off (both channels
must be off for dual channel).
The procedure for the single and dual
channel is the same. Any configuration in
the dual channel sets the same value for
both channels.
1. Press and hold left-bottom display soft
key.
2. Press POWER switch. Continue to press
display soft key until configuration mode
display appears, then release.
Page C1 of configuration mode is
displayed. This is a read-only display.
3. Press page to advance to page to be
configured.
NOTE: For 7131/7231, the default code
will be 5B44 for instruments set to factory
defaults (instead of 2D15).
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults
The Set To Defaults mode programs all
configuration items to their default values.
It is strongly recommended that the
Configurable Options be reviewed for a
complete list of defaults before using this
feature.
1. Advance to C2 page.
2. Press Set to Defaults soft key.
3. Press ok to accept change and return to
beginning of C2 page. Pressing cancel
leaves all items set to their previous
values and returns to beginning of C2
page.
Signature Edition

2A-3
OPTIONS
CONFIGURATION MODE
Config.: 2D15 GOLD
C
page
1
ID No. : 001234567
SW Rev.: 04.08
A B
CAUTION
C
2
OPTIONS
Set all
Configuration
items to their
default values
cancel ok
A B
Set To Defaults
Regional Settings
Air In Line
Profiles
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
(Continued)
2.4.3 Regional Settings
1. From C2 page, press Regional Settings
soft key.
2. Press Region soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle through
region choices (N. America, European).
3. Press Language soft key to select for
language choices .
NOTES:
If there is no tick mark next to
Language, English is the only option.
Instruments configured in European
Regional Settings (with profiles OFF)
do not have a drug list. When Dose
Rate Calculator is chosen (from
OPTIONS menu), followed by Enter
New Program, the instrument defaults
to generic drug dose rate calculation.
beginning of C2 page.
2.4.4 Setting Air-in-Line Threshold
The air-in-line threshold sets the bubble size
sensitivity. The air-in-line reset allows the
clinician to respond to an AIR IN LINE
alarm, assess its clinical significance, and
choose whether or not to continue the
infusion without removing the air. The reset
feature allows only the current bubble to
proceed without tripping an alarm. The air
in line threshold value choices are 50, 100,
200 and 500 microliters.
The Accumulator setting, when on, looks for
10% to 15% of the downstream path to be
air before giving an ACCUMULATED AIR
IN LINE alarm. The amount of air that
causes the alarm will vary with the threshold
setting and rate.
An AIR IN LINE alarm is the result of the
bubble size exceeding the Threshold
setting. An ACCUMULATED AIR IN LINE
alarm is the result when 10 to 15% of the
downstream path is filled with air, exceeding
the accepted level looked for when the
Accumulator is set to On.
2A-4
Signature Edition

Set To Defaults
Regional Settings
Air In Line
Profiles
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
Regional Settings
Region= N. America 2
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
C
Language= English
A B
(Continued)
(Continued)
1. From C2 page, press Air In Line soft
key.
2. Press Threshold soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle through 50
mcL, 100 mcL, 200 mcL and 500 mcL.
NOTE: Use a 50 microliters setting on
microbore tubing. The other three settings
may be used on macrobore tubing.
3. Press Reset soft key to select for editing.
Press again to cycle between On and
Off.
4. Press Accumulator soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
2.4.5 Profiles
1. From C2 page, press Profiles soft key.
2. Press Off or On soft key to select for
On and Off.
NOTES:
The data set for Guardrails
Safety
Software must be loaded to set Profiles
to On. For the Guardrails
Safety
Software to function, Profiles and Dose
Rate must be On.
When Profiles is turned on, the
configuration mode will have limited
access. Access will be limited to
Regional Settings, Profiles, Computer
Link and Optional Features, due to the
data set overriding the configuration
settings as part of the Guardrails
Safety Software.
Signature Edition

2A-5
Threshold=
Air In Line
Reset= Off
Accumulator= On
2
undo ok
100 mcL
OPTIONS
C
A B
Profiles
Off
C
2
OPTIONS
A B
ok undo
Set To Defaults
Regional Settings
Air In Line
Profiles
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
Set To Defaults
Regional Settings
Air In Line
Profiles
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
(Continued)
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate
This sets the maximum selectable rate. The
range for Maximum Rate is 0.1 to
999.9 mL/h.
NOTES:
The maximum rate setting applies to all
infusion modes.
Setting the Maximum Rate below the
preset KVO Rate will lower the KVO Rate.
The KVO Rate will not exceed the
Maximum Rate.
2. Press Maximum Rate soft key.
3. Press the soft key to select the value for
editing.
4. Use numeric keypad to enter maximum
rate. Press Enter.
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link
The Computer Link feature allows a
hospital/facility computer to interact with the
instrument and programs the level of
computer control available. If the feature is
off, the computer cannot communicate with
the instrument.
Monitor Mode allows computer to only
receive information from instrument.
Enabling of monitoring mode automatically
places it in options menu.
Off Mode does not allow any
communication between instrument and a
computer.
1. On C3 page, press Computer Link soft
key.
2A-6
Signature Edition

3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Maximum Rate = C
3
ok
OPTIONS
A B
999.9 mL/hr
Signature Edition

2A-7
(Continued)
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link (Continued)
2. Press Mode soft key to select for editing.
Press again to cycle through Off and
Mntr.
3. Press Baud Rate soft key to select for
choices (300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400,
4800 and 9600).
4. Press Parity soft key to select for editing.
Press again to cycle through Even, Odd,
and None.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return
to beginning of C3 page.
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes
The Optional Modes feature allows the
options menu to be configured to how it will
appear in normal mode. Enabling of these
modes will automatically place them in the
option menu.
When Loading Dose, Multi-Step, and
Multi-Dose are on, they appear in the menu
when options key is pressed in normal
mode.
For Dose Rate to appear in the options
menu, it must be turned on.
Universal Rate: If the DRC mode is
discontinued, the instrument's primary
setting will now be the same as the last rate
and VTBI used in the DRC mode.
NOTES:
Dose Rate must be on in order to use
Guardrails
Safety Software drug selection

capability.
Instruments configured in European
Regional Settings (with profiles OFF) do
not have a drug list. When Dose Rate
Calculator is chosen (from OPTIONS
menu), followed by Enter New Program,
the instrument defaults to generic drug
dose rate calculation.
1. On C3 page, press Optional Modes soft
key.
2. Press Loading Dose soft key to select
for editing. Press again to cycle between
On and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows an initial
infusion rate to be set up for a specific
volume, automatically followed by a
maintenance rate from the same
container.
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Mode = Mntr Off
Baud Rate = 9600
Parity = Even
C
3
ok
OPTIONS
A B
undo
2A-8
Signature Edition

(Continued)
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes (Continued)
3. Press Dose Rate soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle between On
and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows dose
parameters to be programmed so that the
instrument then calculates the volumetric
rate.
4. Press Multi-Step soft key to select for
and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows a sequential
program to deliver up to nine steps; fluid
volumes and delivery rates may be
programmed for each step.
5. Press Multi-Dose soft key to select for
and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows multiple
infusions to be programmed over a period
of up to 24 hours; the fluid volume and
delivery rate is repeated for each delivery.
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features
The Panel Lock feature allows the front
panel to be locked and unlocked to help
prevent tampering.
When VTBI (volume to be infused) is on, a
volume to be infused must be entered;
otherwise, the last remaining VTBI or last
entered VTBI, depending on the channel's
last usage, will be in effect. When VTBI is
off, there is no VTBI line capability.
When the Multi-Dose Alert feature is on, the
option is available to set an alert at the end
of every dose when in the Multi-Dose mode.
1. On C3 page, press Optional Features
soft key.
2. Press Panel Lock soft key to select for
On and Off.
3
Loading Dose On
Dose Rate= On
Multi-Step= Off
Multi-Dose= Off
OPTIONS
C
A B
ok undo
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Panel Lock= On
VTBI= On
Multi-Dose Alert=Off
undo ok
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
Signature Edition

2A-9
(Continued)
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features (Continued)
3. Verify VTBI is On.
NOTE: The flow sensor option (empty
container detector) needs to be installed to
be able to turn VTBI off.
4. Press Multi-Dose Alert soft key to select
On and Off.
5. Press ok to accept changes and return to
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate
The instrument will automatically operate at
the KVO rate (or current rate, whichever is
less) once the primary VTBI has counted
down to zero. The KVO rate range is 0.1 to
20.0 mL/h.
2. Press KVO Rate soft key.
3. Press soft key next to rate value once to
select for editing.
4. Use numeric keypad to enter KVO rate.
Press Enter.
NOTE: The KVO Rate will NOT exceed
the present Maximum Rate.
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
5.0 mL/hr
KVO Rate =
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
4
1.0 mL/hr
KVO Rate =
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
(Continued)
System
Features
Infusion System
incorporates the Dynamic Monitoring
System, a versatile intravenous site

monitoring system for detection of both full
and partial occlusions of the fluid pathway.
This system includes both precision
pressure sensing and continuously
computed Flow Resistance.
Flow Resistance measurement dramatically
improves the ability to detect partial and full
occlusions, particularly at low flow rates.
Resistance monitoring eliminates the impact
of patient elevation and flow rate, to provide
the most direct assessment of patient.
Both the Pressure and Flow Resistance
monitoring modes feature numeric and bar
graph displays of current values plus easily
selectable trend graphs, displaying up to
twelve hours of monitored values.
The Pressure Mode provides 1 mmHg
display resolution, with manual baseline
setting, and a user-adjustable alarm limit.
The Resistance Mode provides two ranges
and user-alert limit adjustment, to meet
neonatal to adult patient needs.
Many monitoring features and functions are
configurable, by qualified technical
personnel, to meet specific needs by
allowing customization.
Monitoring Mode Options
IV lines, catheters, and applications create
various levels of resistance to flow.
Monitoring mode options are available to
meet each clinical application, as follows:
Monitoring Options: To select IV
line/site monitoring modes of resistance,
high resistance, and adjustable pressure.
Pressure: Highest occlusion method,
when set to a default of 600 mmHg,
when Resistance and High Resistance
modes are not sufficient.
Resistance: Designed to monitor IV
line/site resistance, providing optimum
sensitivity. Used for larger catheter sizes
(up to 24 gauge).
High Resistance: Designed to monitor
IV line/site resistance, with optimum
sensitivity where smaller (higher
resistance) catheters (26 or 28 gauge)
are used.
AutoRestartPlus
The AutoRestartPlus feature provides the
ability to automatically continue an infusion
if downstream resistance or pressure
measurements indicate that an occlusion
condition has cleared with a 40-second
Checking Line period (excluding High
Resistance monitoring mode). If the
condition is not cleared, the OCCLUSION
DOWNSTREAM alarm occurs and infusion
is stopped until manually restarted.
The Checking Line message and tone are
presented whenever a resistance or
pressure measurement exceeds its alarm
threshold.
In resistance monitoring modes, the
Checking Line period is caused by a
measured resistance of 100% or a
pressure level exceeding a configured
threshold. This pressure threshold is
separate from the Pressure mode
threshold.
2A-10
Signature Edition

(continued)
System
Features (Continued)
If resistance measurements initiate the
Checking Line condition, the channel
will continue infusing in order to
determine if the measured flow
resistance has changed. In Resistance
monitoring mode, if the measured flow
resistance falls to any value below 100%,
the channel will resume normal operating
conditions automatically (excluding High
Resistance monitoring mode).
In resistance monitoring modes, pressure
measurements initiate the Checking
Line period when the pressure exceeds
the limit. If the pressure falls to less than
one third of the configured limit with 40
seconds, normal flow resumes.
In pressure monitoring mode, the
Checking Line period is caused by
pressure exceeding the alarm limit. If the
pressure falls to less than one third of the
alarm limit within 40 seconds, normal
flow resumes.
Qualified service personnel can turn off this
feature (set restarts to zero), or program
from 1 to 9 restarts.
In High Resistance monitoring mode,
restarts do not occur for resistance
measurements.
After the programmed number of restarts
has occurred, the channel will immediately
alarm OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM, if
pressure or flow resistance conditions
indicate an occlusion. The programmed
number of restarts become available again
when RUN/HOLD or the run soft key is
pressed.
NOTE: The restart counter is reset whenever
RUN/HOLD is pressed, the instrument or
Trend Graphs
Trend graphs display downstream pressure
or flow resistance over time (up to 12
hours).
In Pressure, Resistance, and High
Resistance monitoring modes, the trend
graph displays the flow pattern over time.
Downstream occlusions, which occur in the
Pressure or Resistance modes, will be
indicated by a vertical tick mark at the top of
the trend screen.
Trend graphs of fifteen minutes, one hour,
four hours and twelve hours are available
during normal operation.
1. On C4 page, press Monitoring Options
soft key.
Signature Edition

2A-11
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
Mode= Pressure
Restarts= 3
Trends= On
ok
OPTIONS
C
Undo
A B
(Continued)
System
Features (Continued)
Press again to cycle between Hi Resist,
Resist and Pressure.
3. Press Restarts soft key. Use numeric
keypad to enter number of restarts, from
"0" (which turns feature off) to "9", then
press Enter.
4. Press Trends soft key to select for
On and Off.
In Pressure mode, graph displays in
mmHg.
Trend data is lost when:
graph information is cleared
instrument is off for more than
12 hours
Trend data is maintained when:
rate is changed
battery is depleted
Trend data is scaled (by 3 times or
1/3, as applicable) when cycling
between Resistance and Hi
Resistance modes.
6. Precision Flow: Selecting Pressure
Mode and running below 50 mL/h will
place instrument into Precision Flow
Mode.
Precision Flow addresses both flow
resolution (parts or pulses per mL) and
flow continuity (time between pulses).
The instrument will divide each mL into
3600 parts and equally space these parts
into a virtually continuous delivery. With
Precision Flow, the longest time between
a part/pulse at 0.1 mL/h is 10 seconds.
As the rate increases, this time will
become shorter.
NOTE: Resistance measurement is
restarted at 0% when:
RUN/HOLD is pressed to put on hold
and again to start.
Dose ends in Multi-Dose mode.
Checking Line message appears.
Checking Line alert applies to pressure,
resistance and upstream occlusion, with
one tone at the beginning and a flashing
popup display (on for 4 seconds, off for
6 seconds).
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume
The volume settings determine which range
of audio volume is available. For example,
"Low" may be too low, therefore "Med Hi"
would be chosen. A transition tone, if
enabled, will sound upon completion of a
secondary VTBI, step in multi-step mode,
dose beginning and ending in multi-dose
mode, and completion of a loading dose in
loading-dose mode.
The speaker volumes are approximately:
Low = 60 dB, Med = 65 dB, and Hi = 70 dB
at one meter.
2A-12
Signature Edition

Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
(Continued)
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume (Continued)
1. On C4 menu, press Audio soft key.
2. Press Volumes soft key to select for
Low, Med, Hi, Med Hi, or Hi.
3. Press Trans. Tone soft key to select for
and Off.
2.4.13 Setting Configuration Name
(Instrument ID Label)
The characters entered here will be shown
in the lower LCD display. This electronic
label is normally displayed, even when the
instrument is off.
The configuration name can be used to
uniquely identify the instrument's
configuration, facility location, or reference
number. It is a 4-character alpha-numeric
name; for example, PICU (Pediatric
Intensive Care Unit), ICU (Intensive Care
Unit), or 2400.
NOTE: A 4-digit alpha-numeric code can be
seen next to the configuration name upon
entering Configuration Mode (refer to
Entering Configuration Mode section in this
chapter). This code is only a hexadecimal
reflection of the instruments configuration.
1. On C4 menu, press Configuration
Name soft key.
Signature Edition

2A-13
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
Volumes= Low Med Hi
Trans. Tones= On
Audio
ok
OPTIONS
C
Undo
A B
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
(Continued)
(Instrument ID Label) (Continued)
2. Press Config. Name soft key to position
highlight on character to be changed.
3. Press character soft keys aligned with
rows A to M, N to Z or O to "_" to
highlight needed character.
4. Press Enter. Up to 4 characters can be
programmed in this way. Repeat steps 2,
3, 4 as necessary.
NOTES:
If the configuration has been changed
but not the name, the instrument will
display the option to rename before
turning off or proceeding to the Teach
Mode. Refer to Pop-Up Displays
section for further explanation.
There must be 4 characters in the
configuration name. Use the space
symbol ( _ ) to fill in any open
characters.
2.4.14 Resistance Options
Resistance Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of resistance in the line while
monitoring a single channel.
Resistance Alert: Provides an early
warning of increases in downstream flow
resistance by allowing the level to be
adjusted in 5% increments during operation.
Default Alert: Provides a starting point for
occlusion detection if a different level has
not been chosen. The selected level will
remain in effect while the instrument is on,
until another option is selected from the
Monitoring Options page.
Alarm: Provides the option to lower the
pressure occlusion setting that is still active,
even in resistance modes.
2. Press Resistance Options soft key.
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Manual Baseline
page
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Resist Display= On
Resist Alert = On
Default Alert = 100%
Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo
ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
2A-14
Signature Edition

4
A B
OPTIONS
C
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _
A B C D E F H J K L M G I
Config. Name= OLD G
undo ok enter
(Continued)
2.4.14 Resistance Options (Continued)
3. Press Resist Display soft key to select
On and Off.
NOTE: Setting Resist Display to Off will
clear Default Alert from the screen and
change Resist Alert to Off.
4. Press Resist Alert soft key to select for
On and Off.
NOTES:
Setting Resist Alert to Off will clear
Default Alert from the screen.
Resistance alert will give an alarm tone
every thirty seconds, with a popup
display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6
seconds). This occurs when the
resistance measurement is above the
alert threshold or at 100%, even when
checking the line. If the display is off,
the alert feature will automatically be
turned off.
5. Press Default Alert soft key to select for
editing. Enter a number using keypad,
then press Enter. Instrument will round
up or down to nearest 5% increment.
NOTE: To set the Default Alert level,
both Resist Display and Resist Alert
need to be On.
6. Press Alarm soft key to select for editing.
Enter a number using keypad, then press
Enter.
2.4.15 Pressure Options
Pressure Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of pressure in the line while
Pressure Alarm: Allows the choice of a
fixed pressure mode or an adjustable
pressure mode.
Adjustable Pressure: Provides an early
warning of increases in downstream
pressure. Designed to monitor IV
line/site based on pressure, and provide
user-adjustable pressure alarm limits.
Used for the smallest of catheter sizes
and special applications; such as,
infusion through transducers, into dialysis
systems, and for the highest resistance
catheters (including some neonatal PICC
catheters).
Fixed Pressure: Designed to monitor IV
line/site pressure and alarm, based on a
fixed pressure limit of 600 mmHg. Used
when adjustable pressure is not wanted.
catheters).
Maximum Pressure: Provides the
maximum pressure alarm limit if the
Pressure Alarm mode is set to Adjustable.
Any value between 25 mmHg and 600
mmHg (in increments of 25 mmHg)
inclusively can be entered.
If Max Press is set to a value less than Def
Alarm, the Def Alarm threshold will
automatically be set to the Max Press value
and Default Alarm Must Be Less Than or
Equal to XXX mmHg (which is Max Press
level) will be displayed.
Signature Edition

2A-15
(Continued)
2.4.15 Pressure Options (Continued)
Default Alarm: Provides an adjustable
pressure setting in 25 mmHg increments
(25-600 range). This value can not exceed
the Maximum Pressure that was set above.
If an attempt is made to enter a Def Alarm
value greater than Max Press, the entry will
be rejected with a popup screen and an
audible tone.
In addition, the Def Alarm edit field will be
highlighted and set to the Max Press value.
Pressure Alarm = Adj must be selected to
change from 600 mmHg.
2. Press Pressure Options soft key.
3. Press Pressure Dsply soft key to select
On and Off.
4. Press Pressure Alarm soft key to select
Adj and Fix.
5. Press Max Press soft key to select for
up or down to nearest
25 mmHg increment.
6. Press Def Alarm soft key to select for
up or down to nearest
25 mmHg increment.
NOTE: Enter the Def Alarm value that is
less than or equal to the Max Press value.
2.4.16 Manual Baseline
Auto Baseline: The instrument reads a
baseline at startup and then adds the alarm
limit, to determine the point of alarm.
For example, if an alarm limit of
300 mmHg was selected, the instrument
would alarm at baseline + 300 mmHg. Auto
Zeroing occurs the first time RUN/HOLD is
pressed; this will be the maximum baseline.
Subsequent presses of RUN/HOLD will only
lower (not raise) the baseline.
Manual Baseline: Sets a fixed baseline and
overrides the Auto Zero level until the
instrument is turned off, the latch is opened,
the set is reloaded, or the pressure baseline
function is performed again. This allows the
instrument to display the actual pressure
required for an IV to infuse. To get this real
time readout, Manual Baseline must be
On.
2A-16
Signature Edition

Pressure Dsply= On
Pressure Alarm= Adj
Max Press= 600 mmHg
Def Alarm= 600 mmHg
undo ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Manual Baseline
page
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
(Continued)
2.4.16 Manual Baseline (Continued)
To activate this mode with the instrument on
hold, or at startup, press the OPTIONS key
and then select Set Pressure Baseline and
press ok.
When RUN/HOLD is pressed, the bar graph
will show the alarm point with a tic mark on
the bar graph, and the actual pressure in the
line will be displayed below the bar graph.
1. Advance to C5 page
2. Press Manual Baseline soft key to select
for editing.
3. Press On or Off soft key to cycle
between On and Off.
2.5 TRANSFERRING SETTINGS TO
ANOTHER INSTRUMENT
Once an instrument has been programmed
to meet technical and clinical needs, the
settings can be transferred to other
instruments. The programmed instrument is
referred to as the "Teacher" and the other
instrument is referred to as the "Learner".
NOTE: Only the configuration settings will be
transferred. The instrument ID number,
periodic maintenance settings and other
settings from the diagnostics mode will not be
transferred. The Guardrails
Safety Software
data sets will NOT be transferred.
Connect a standard 9-pin Null Modem
RS-232 cable (ALARIS P/N 133450) to the
RS-232 ports on the instruments.
NOTE: Instrument software versions 4.06
and 4.08 use same "Rev.01.24" and can be
used to learn/teach one instrument to the
next.
Signature Edition

2A-17
Manual Baseline=
On
5
C
ok
A B
OPTIONS
C
undo
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Manual Baseline
page
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
ANOTHER INSTRUMENT (Continued)
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument Procedure
NOTE: The Learn/Teach function will not
work if the version level for Learn/Teach is
not the same on both instruments. It is not
recommended to Learn/Teach different
model families; such as, using a Model
7130/7230 to Learn/Teach a Model
7131/7231.
1. Access Configuration Mode for both
"teacher" and "learner" instruments and
advance to C6 page.
2. Press Teach soft key of "teacher"
instrument and Press Learn soft key of
"learner" instrument.
3. Press start soft key of "teacher"
instrument.
Downloading displays until transfer is
complete, and then display indicates if
transfer was successful or unsuccessful.
NOTES:
Repeat allows the operator to reattempt
teaching the current instrument or to teach
the next instrument.
Reattach the cover, and/or cover and
screws, over the RS-232 port after
disconnecting the cable.
When the profile/data sets are used they
will override (replace) the selection in the
Configuration Mode. Learn/Teach will
need to be done after the profile/data set
is loaded to ensure proper use (Profiles
On).
Learn/Teach can be used for transferring
the Configuration Mode settings, but not
the Guardrails
Safety Software data set

(flashed from computer only).
When a Learn/Teach operation is
unsuccessful due to incompatible versions,
the teacher or learner instrument will
display the message "Learn/Teach Failed
Software Mismatch".
2A-18
Signature Edition

6
Teach Status
Awaiting Start
2D15 GOLD
cancel start
A B
OPTIONS
C
6
Teach Status
Learn/Teach Failed
Software Mismatch
cancel repeat
A B
OPTIONS
C
Learn: Rev. 01.24
Teach: Rev. 01.24
6
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays
The pop-up screens appear when an
attempt is made to turn off an instrument or
execute the teach mode after changing the
configuration (or accessing a configured
item), but not changing the configuration
name. If the instrument's configuration is
changed and not the configuration name,
instruments with the same name may have
different configurations. The pop-up menus
ask if the configuration should be renamed.
Signature Edition

2A-19
Configuration has
Press POWER key
to keep name GOLD
cancel rename
A B
OPTIONS
C
been changed
Configuration has
Press teach key
to keep name GOLD
cancel rename
A B
OPTIONS
C
been changed
teach
2A-20
Signature Edition

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
Instrument ID/Serial #
Config Name
(Instr Label)
Location
Regional Settings
Air-In-Line:
Threshold
Reset
Accumulator
l l l l l
Profiles
Dose Rate Calculator Generic Dose Rate Calculator only
Maximum Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h
Computer Link:
Mode
Baud Rate
Parity
Optional Modes:
Loading Dose
Dose Rate
Multi-Step
Multi-Dose
Optional Features
Panel Lock
VTBI
Multi-Dose Alert
KVO Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h
Table 2-1. Record of Configured Instruments
--- Table Continued on Next Page ---
Signature Edition

2A-21
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
Monitoring Options:
Mode
Restarts
Trends
Audio:
Volume
Trans. Tone
Resistance Options:
Resist Display
Resist Alarm
Default Alarm
Alarm
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
Pressure Options:
Pressure Display
Pressure Alarm
Maximum Pressure
Default Alarm
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
mmHg
Manual Baseline

Instrument ID/Serial # is accessed through Diagnostic Mode. Refer to the Entering Diagnostic
Mode section in the Troubleshooting chapter.
Table 2-1. Record of Configured Instruments (Continued)
2A-22
Signature Edition

Figure 2-1. Map of Configuration Screens
OPTIONS
CONFIGURATION MODE
Config.: 2D15 GOLD
C
page
1
ID No. : 001234567
SW Rev.: 04.08
A B
Set To Defaults
Regional Settings
Air In Line
Profiles
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
C
2
OPTIONS
Set all
Configuration
items to their
default values
cancel ok
A B
Regional Settings
Region= N. America 2
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
C
Language= English
A B
Threshold=
Air In Line
Reset= Off
Accumulator= On
2
undo ok
100 mcL
OPTIONS
C
A B
Profiles
Off
C
2
OPTIONS
A B
ok undo
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Maximum Rate = C
3
ok
OPTIONS
A B
999.9 mL/hr
Signature Edition

2A-23
Figure 2-1. Map of Configuration Screens (Continued)
Mode = Mntr Off
Baud Rate = 9600
Parity = Even
C
3
ok
OPTIONS
A B
undo
3
Loading Dose On
Dose Rate= On
Multi-Step= Off
Multi-Dose= Off
OPTIONS
C
A B
ok undo
Panel Lock= On
VTBI= On
undo ok
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
5.0 mL/hr
KVO Rate =
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
4
Mode= Pressure
Restarts= 3
Trends= On
ok
OPTIONS
C
Undo
A B
4
Volumes= Low Med Hi
Trans. Tones= On
Audio
ok
OPTIONS
C
Undo
A B
4
A B
OPTIONS
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _
A B C D E F H J K L M G I
Config. Name= OLD G
undo ok enter
2A-24
Signature Edition

Learn: Rev. 01.24
Teach: Rev. 01.24
6
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
6
Learn Status
Awaiting Download
cancel start
A B
OPTIONS
C
6
Teach Status
Awaiting Start
2D15 GOLD
cancel start
A B
OPTIONS
C
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Manual Baseline
page
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Resist Display= On
Resist Alert = On
Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo
ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Pressure Dsply= On
Pressure Alarm= Adj
Max Press= 600 mmHg
Def Alarm= 600 mmHg
undo ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Manual Baseline=
On
5
C
ok
A B
OPTIONS
C
undo
(Continued)
2
B
C
H
E
C
K
O
U
T
&

C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N
Chapter 2B CHECKOUT AND CONFIGURATION
Software Version 2.78
Signature Edition

2B-1
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the initial setup and
configuration of an instrument with software
version 2.78.
2.2 NEW INSTRUMENT CHECKOUT
Refer to the instrument's Directions For Use
(DFU) for instructions regarding unpacking
and setting up the instrument for the first
time.
When turning on the instrument, verify the
instrument beeps and that all display LED
segments flash. This confirms that the
instrument has performed its self test and is
operating correctly. During operation, the
instrument continually performs a self test,
and will alarm and display a message if it
detects an internal malfunction.
Contact ALARIS Medical Systems
authorized service personnel if the
instrument has physical damage, fails to
satisfactorily pass startup sequence, fails a
self test or continues to alarm.
For new instrument checkout refer to the
GOLD Infusion
System DFU.
2.3 CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS AND
DEFAULTS
A hospital/facility biomedical technician has
the capability to set all configuration
parameters to their startup defaults in a
single operation. The terms "configuration
parameters" and "programmable features"
are interchangeable and have the same
meaning. Refer to the applicable Signature
Edition

more information.
Keep latch closed when instrument is
not in use.
CAUTION
Should an instrument be jarred severely or
dropped, remove it from use immediately. It
should be thoroughly tested and inspected by
qualified service personnel to ensure proper
function prior to reuse.
CAUTION
2B-2
Signature Edition

When an instruments configuration is
changed, the configuration name
should also be changed in order to
document the new parameter settings.
The intent of the configuration name is
to have only one set of parameters for
each alpha-numeric code. Refer to
Pop-Up Displays section.
Powering down in configuration mode
during an alarm or error will NOT save
any configuration changes.
The configuration procedure is for use by
qualified service personnel only. The
configuration mode is intended for
programming the technical and clinical
features in accordance with current
procedures and practices.
Table 2-3, Record of Configured
Instruments, can be reproduced and used
to record and track instrument
configuration settings.
A map of all the configuration screens is
located at the end of this chapter (Figure
2-2).
SEC PRI
Clear Enter
OPT PRI HLD SEC KVO
1
RUN
HOLD
POWER
OPTIONS
2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
ml/hr
WARNINGS
NOTES:
Pressing a soft key at the side of the Main
Display the first time, selects it for editing.
available options. Other features are edited
by means of the numeric keypad entry.
Pressing undo undoes any edits made to
that page, and stays on the page.
Pressing ok accepts all information on the
page, and returns to menu page.
Pressing the POWER switch after editing a
configurable item evokes an invalid key tone
and a message to "ok entry". ok must be
selected to accept the edit before the
instrument can be powered off.
The page number is located in the upper-
right corner of the display.
(Continued)
The instruments configuration information is
not lost when disconnected from AC power.
However, error history and infusion program
settings may be lost. If this information is to
be saved, be sure to record it before
disconnecting power.
2.4.1 Entering Configuration Mode
must be off for dual-channel).
The procedure for the single and dual
channel instrument is the same. Any
configuration in the dual channel sets the
same value for both channels.
1. Press and hold left-bottom display soft
key.
2. Press POWER switch. Continue to press
display soft key until configuration mode
display appears, then release.
Page C1 of configuration mode is
configured.
NOTE: For 7131/7231, the default code
will be 4EF3 (instead of BFFF) for
instruments set to factory defaults.
2.4.2 Setting to Defaults
The Set To Defaults mode programs all
configuration items to their default values.
It is strongly recommended that the
Configurable Options be reviewed for a
complete list of defaults before using this
feature.
2. Press Set to Defaults soft key.
beginning of C2 page. Pressing cancel
leaves all items set to their previous
values and returns to beginning of C2
page.
Signature Edition

2B-3
CAUTION
OPTIONS
CONFIGURATION MODE
Config.: BFFF IVAC
C
page
1
ID No. : 001234567
SW Rev.: 02.78
A B
CAUTION
Set To Defaults
Language
Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
OPTIONS

default values
C
ok
2
configuration
items to their
A B
cancel
Set All
(Continued)
2.4.3 Setting Language
Language choices for Models 7130/7230
are English and Canadian French.
Language choices for Models 7131/7231
are Dutch, English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish and Swedish. All displays will be in
language selected, except diagnostic and
configuration modes, which remain in
English.
1. From C2 page, press Language soft key.
2. Press soft key to select for editing. Press
again to cycle through language choices.
NOTE: Dutch and German are choices in
the language options, but labels and DFUs
are not available in these languages for
this software version.
The air-in-line threshold sets the bubble size
sensitivity. The air-in-line reset allows the
clinician to respond to an Air-in-Line alarm,
assess the clinical significance of the air,
and choose whether or not to continue the
infusion without removing the air. The reset
feature allows only the current bubble to
proceed without tripping an alarm. The air
in line threshold value choices are 50, 100,
200 and 500 microliters.
The Accumulator setting, when on, looks for
10% to 15% of the downstream path to be
air before giving an Accumulated Air-in-
Line alarm. The amount of air that causes
the alarm will vary with the threshold setting
and rate.
An Air-in-Line alarm is the result of the
bubble size exceeding the Threshold
setting. An Accumulated Air-in-Line alarm
is the result when 10 to 15% of the
downstream path is filled with air, exceeding
the accepted level looked for when
Accumulator is set to On.
1. From C2 page, press Air In Line soft
key.
2. Press Threshold soft key to select for
editing. Press again to cycle through 50
mcL, 100 mcL, 200 mcL and 500 mcL.
2B-4
Signature Edition

Set To Defaults
Language
Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
Language=
English 2
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
C
A B
Set To Defaults
Language
Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE: Use a 50 microliters setting on
microbore tubing. All other settings may
be used on macrobore tubing.
3. Press Reset soft key to select for editing.
Press again to cycle between On and
Off.
4. Press Accumulator soft key to select for
On and Off.
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs
NOTE: In Models 7131/7231, Drug? is used
instead of a drug list option. There is no tick
mark next to Dose Rate.
The Dose Rate Drugs feature allows
selection of a drug name to program a dose
rate calculated infusion while in normal
mode.
1. From C2 page, press Dose Rate Drugs
soft key.
Introduction screen appears and displays
legend used when selecting a drug.
2. Page forward to select drug or select
done to go to Summary Page.
Use short list symbol s to select
drugs that appear in short list. This is
a convenient way to display frequently
used drugs immediately in normal
drug selection process (startup mode,
press options key).
Use extended list symbol e when
selecting drugs to appear in extended
list. Extended list, if configured,
provides a secondary list of drug
names not normally used.
Signature Edition

2B-5
Threshold=
Air In Line
Reset= Off
Accumulator= On
2
undo ok
100 mcL
OPTIONS
C
A B
Set To Defaults
Language
Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
OPTIONS
Dose Rate Drugs
( ) = not displayed
C
page
2
(s) = short list
(e) = extended list
A B
done
2B-6
Signature Edition

Alfentanil (Alfent) Methylprednisolone
Alprostadil (Prostin) (PGE-1)
Milrinone
Alteplase (Activase) Morphene
Aminophylline Nitroglucerin (Tridil)
Amrione (Inocar) Nitroprusside (Nipride)
Atracurium (Tracurium) Norepinephrine (Levophed)
Bretylium (Bretylol) Oxytocin
Cimetidine (Tagamet) Phenylephrine (Neo-Synephrine)
Diltiazem (Cardizem) Potassium Chlor
Dobutamine (Dobutrex) Procainamide
Dopamine (Intropin) Propofol (Diprivan)
Esmilol (Brevibloc) Ranitidine (Zantac)
Heparin Streptokinase (Streptase)
Isoproterenol (Isuprel) Succinylcholine (Anectine)
Labetalo (Normodyne) (Trandate)
Theophylline
Lidocaine (Xylocaine) Urokinase (Abbokinase)
Magnesium Sulfate Vecuronium (Norcuron)
Table 2-2. Drug List (7130/7230 only)
(Continued)
2.4.5 Setting Dose Rate Drugs (continued)
3. Press done at any time to display
Summary Page. Press page to
advance to next page.
4. Press Extended List soft key to cycle
between s and blank. If blank is
selected, extended list will not be
available.
5. Press Drug? soft key to cycle between
s, e and blank. Use s for
commonly used drugs.
6. Press a soft key next to a drug to cycle
between s, e and blank. Press
Page to continue viewing drug list.
Refer to Table 2-2 Drug List to view full
list of drugs.
7. Press done to display Summary Page.
8. Press review to return to introduction
screen or press ok to accept selections
and return to C2 page.
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate
This sets the maximum selectable rate. The
range for Maximum Rate is 0.1 to
999.9 mL/h.
NOTES:
The maximum rate setting applies to all
infusion modes.
Setting the Maximum Rate below the
preset KVO Rate will lower the KVO Rate.
The KVO Rate will not exceed the
Maximum Rate.
2. Press Maximum Rate soft key.
3. Press the soft key to select the value for
editing.
Signature Edition

2B-7
OPTIONS
Summary
Drug? Selected
C
ok
2
14 drugs selected
EXT D LIST selected
A B
review
EXTENDED LIST
s-Drug?
-Alfentanil
-Alprostadil
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
done
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
C
3
OPTIONS
Maximum Rate =
999.9 mL/hr
ok
A B
2B-8
Signature Edition

(Continued)
2.4.6 Setting Maximum Rate (Continued)
4. Use numeric keypad to enter maximum
rate. Press Enter.
2.4.7 Setting Computer Link
The Computer Link feature allows a
hospital/facility computer to interact with the
instrument and programs the level of
computer control available. The computer
cannot start or stop the instrument, set the
rate, or make any change in status. If the
feature is off, the computer cannot
communicate with the instrument.
Control Mode allows computer to send
information to instruments display.
Monitor Mode allows computer to only
receive information from instrument.
Enabling of monitoring mode automatically
places it in options menu.
Off Mode does not allow any
communication between instrument and a
computer.
1. On C3 page, press Computer Link soft
key.
Press again to cycle through Off, Mntr
Off and Ctrl Mntr Off.
3. Press Baud Rate soft key to select for
choices (300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400,
4800 and 9600).
4. Press Parity soft key to select for editing.
Press again to cycle through Even, Odd,
and None.
Mode = Off
Baud Rate = 9600
Parity = None
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
ok undo
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
Signature Edition

2B-9
(Continued)
2.4.8 Setting Optional Modes
The Optional Modes feature allows the
options menu to be configured to how it will
appear in normal mode. Enabling of these
modes automatically places them in the
option menu.
When Loading Dose, Multi-Step, and
Multi-Dose are on, they appear in the menu
when the OPTIONS key is pressed in
normal mode.
For Dose Rate to appear in the options
menu, it must be turned on.
1. On C3 page, press Optional Modes soft
key.
2. Press Loading Dose soft key to select
On and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows an initial
infusion rate to be set up for a specific
volume, automatically followed by a
maintenance rate from the same
container.
3. Press Dose Rate soft key to select for
and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows dose
parameters to be programmed so that the
instrument then calculates the volumetric
rate.
4. Press Multi-Step soft key to select for
and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows a sequential
program to deliver up to nine steps; fluid
volumes and delivery rates may be
programmed for each step.
5. Press Multi-Dose soft key to select for
On and Off.
NOTE: This feature allows multiple
infusions to be programmed over a period
of up to 24 hours; the fluid volume and
delivery rate is repeated for each delivery.
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
3
Dose Rate = On
Multi-Step = Off
Multi-Dose = Off
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Loading Dose On
3
Loading Dose On
Dose Rate= On
Multi-Step= Off
Multi-Dose= Off
OPTIONS
C
A B
ok undo
2B-10
Signature Edition

(Continued)
2.4.9 Setting Optional Features
The Panel Lock feature allows the front
panel to be locked and unlocked to help
prevent tampering.
When VTBI (volume to be infused) is on, a
volume to be infused must be entered;
otherwise, the last remaining VTBI or last
entered VTBI, depending on the channel's
last usage, will be in effect. When VTBI is
off, there is no VTBI line capability.
When the Multi-Dose Alert feature is on, the
option is available to set an alert at the end
of every dose when in the Multi-Dose mode.
1. On C3 page, press Optional Features
soft key.
2. Press Panel Lock soft key to select for
On and Off.
3. Verify VTBI is On.
NOTE: The flow sensor option (empty
container detector) needs to be installed
to be able to turn VTBI off.
4. Press Multi-Dose Alert soft key to select
On and Off.
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate
The instrument will automatically operate at
the KVO rate (or current rate, whichever is
less) once the primary VTBI has counted
down to zero. The KVO rate range is 0.1 to
20.0 mL/h.
2. Press KVO Rate soft key.
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
Panel Lock= On
VTBI= On
undo ok
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
KVO Rate =
5.0 mL/hr
undo ok
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
(Continued)
2.4.10 Setting KVO Rate (Continued)
3. Press soft key next to rate value once to
select for editing.
4. Use the numeric keypad to enter KVO
rate. Press Enter.
NOTE: The KVO Rate will NOT exceed
the present Maximum Rate.
System
Features
Infusion System
incorporates the Dynamic Monitoring
System, a versatile intravenous site

monitoring system for detection of both full
and partial occlusions of the fluid pathway.
This system includes both precision
pressure sensing and continuously
computed Flow Resistance.
Flow Resistance measurement dramatically
improves the ability to detect partial and full
occlusions, particularly at low flow rates.
Resistance monitoring eliminates the impact
of patient elevation and flow rate, to provide
the most direct assessment of patency.
Both the Pressure and Flow Resistance
monitoring modes feature numeric and bar
graph displays of current values plus easily
selectable trend graphs, displaying up to
twelve hours of monitored values.
The Pressure Mode provides 1 mmHg
display resolution, either manual or auto
baseline setting, and a user-adjustable
alarm limit.
The Resistance Mode provides two ranges
and user-alert limit adjustment, to meet
neonatal to adult patients needs.
Many monitoring features and functions are
configurable, by qualified technical
personnel, to meet specific needs by
allowing customization.
Monitoring Mode Options
IV lines, catheters, and applications create
various levels of resistance to flow.
Monitoring mode options are available to
meet each clinical application, as follows:
Monitoring Options: to select IV line/site
monitoring modes of resistance, high
resistance, and adjustable pressure.
Pressure: highest occlusion method,
when set to a default of 600 mmHg,
when Resistance and High Resistance
modes are not sufficient.
Signature Edition

2B-11
KVO Rate =
1.0 mL/hr
undo ok
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
2B-12
Signature Edition

(Continued)
System Features (Continued)

Resistance: designed to monitor IV
line/site resistance, providing optimum
sensitivity. Used for larger catheter sizes
(up to 24 gauge).
High Resistance: designed to monitor
IV line/site resistance, with optimum
sensitivity where smaller (higher
resistance) catheters (26 or 28 gauge)
are used.
AutoRestartPlus
The AutoRestartPlus feature provides the
ability to automatically continue an infusion
if downstream resistance or pressure
measurements indicate that an occlusion
condition has cleared with a 40-second
Checking Line period (excluding High
Resistance monitoring mode). If the
condition is not cleared, the OCCLUSION
DOWNSTREAM alarm occurs and infusion
is stopped until manually restarted.
The Checking Line message and tone are
presented whenever a resistance or
pressure measurement exceeds its alarm
threshold.
In resistance monitoring modes, the
Checking Line period is caused by a
measured resistance of 100% or a
pressure level exceeding a configured
threshold. This pressure threshold is
separate from the Pressure mode
threshold.
If resistance measurements initiate the
Checking Line condition, the channel
will continue infusing in order to
determine if the measured flow
resistance has changed. In Resistance
monitoring mode, if the measured flow
resistance falls to any value below 100%,
the channel will resume normal operating
conditions automatically (excluding High
Resistance monitoring mode).
In resistance monitoring modes, pressure
measurements initiate the Checking Line
period when the pressure exceeds the
limit. If the pressure falls to less than one
third of the configured limit within 40
seconds, normal flow resumes.
In Pressure monitoring mode, the
Checking Line period is caused by
pressure exceeding the alarm limit. If the
pressure falls to less than one third of the
alarm limit within 40 seconds, normal
flow resumes.
Qualified service personnel can turn off this
feature (set restarts to zero), or program
from 1 to 9 restarts.
In High Resistance monitoring mode,
restarts do not occur for resistance
measurements.
After the programmed number of restarts
has occurred the channel will immediately
alarm OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM, if
pressure or flow resistance conditions
indicate an occlusion. The programmed
number of restarts become available again
when RUN/HOLD or the run soft key is
pressed.
NOTE: The restart counter is reset whenever
RUN/HOLD is pressed, the instrument or
Signature Edition

2B-13
(Continued)

Trend Graphs
Trend graphs display downstream pressure
or flow resistance over time (up to 12
hours).
In Pressure, Resistance, and High
Resistance monitoring modes, the trend
graph displays the flow pattern over time.
Downstream occlusions, which occur in the
Pressure or Resistance modes, will be
indicated by a vertical tick mark at the top of
the trend screen.
Trend graphs of fifteen minutes, one hour,
four hours, and twelve hours are available
during normal operation.
1. On C4 page, press Monitoring Options
soft key.
Press again to cycle between Hi Resist,
Resist, and Pressure.
3. Press Restarts soft key. Use numeric
keypad to enter number of restarts, from
"0" (which turns feature off) to "9", then
press Enter.
4. Press Trends soft key to select for
On and Off.
In Pressure mode, graph displays in
mmHg.
Trend data is lost when:
graph information is cleared
instrument is off for more than
6 hours
Trend data is maintained when:
rate is changed
instrument is off for less than
6 hours
Trend data is scaled (by 3 times or by
1/3, as applicable) when cycling
between Resistance and Hi
Resistance modes.
6. Precision Flow: Selecting Pressure
Mode and running below 50 mL/h will
place instrument into Precision Flow
Mode.
Precision Flow addresses both flow
resolution (parts or pulses per mL) and
flow continuity (time between pulses).
The instrument will divide each mL into
3600 parts and equally space these parts
into a virtually continuous delivery. With
Precision Flow the longest time between
a part/pulse at 0.1 mL/h is 10 seconds.
As the rate increases, this time becomes
shorter.
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
Mode= Pressure
Restarts= 3
Trends= On
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Monitoring Options
(Continued)

NOTE: Resistance measurement is
restarted at 0% when:
RUN/HOLD is pressed to put on hold
and again to start.
Dose ends in Multi-Dose mode.
Checking Line message appears.
Checking Line alert applies to pressure,
resistance and upstream occlusion, with
one tone at the beginning and a flashing
popup display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6
seconds). No nurse call activation.
2.4.12 Setting Audio Volume
The volume settings determine which range
of audio volume is available. For example,
"Low" may be too low, so "Med Hi" would be
chosen. A transition tone, if enabled, will
sound upon completion of a secondary
VTBI, step in multi-step mode, dose
beginning and ending in multi-dose mode,
and completion of a loading dose in loading-
dose mode.
The speaker volumes are approximately:
Low = 60 dB, Med = 65 dB, and Hi = 70 dB
at one meter.
1. On C4 menu, press Audio soft key.
2. Press Volumes soft key to select for
Low, Med, Hi, Med/Hi, or Hi.
3. Press Trans. Tone soft key to select for
and Off
(Instrument ID Label)
The characters entered here will be shown
in the lower LCD display. This electronic
label is normally displayed, even when the
pump is off.
The configuration name can be used to
uniquely identify the instrument's
configuration, facility location, or reference
number. It is a 4 character alpha-numeric
name. For example, PICU (Pediatric
Intensive Care Unit), ICU (Intensive Care
Unit), or 2400.
NOTE: A 4-digit alpha-numeric code can be
seen next to the configuration name upon
entering Configuration Mode (refer to
Entering Configuration Mode section in this
chapter). This code is only a hexadecimal
reflection of the instruments configuration.
2B-14
Signature Edition

KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
Audio
Volumes = Low Med Hi
undo ok
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
Trans. Tones = On
Signature Edition

2B-15
(Continued)
(Instrument ID Label) (Continued)
1. On C4 menu, press Configuration
Name soft key.
2. Press Config. Name soft key to position
highlight on character to be changed.
3. Press character soft keys aligned with
rows A to M, N to Z or O to "_" to
highlight desired character.
4. Press Enter. Up to 4 characters can be
programmed in this way. Repeat steps
2, 3, 4 as necessary.
NOTES:
If the configuration has been changed,
but not the name, the instrument will
display the option to rename before
turning off or proceeding to the Teach
Mode. Refer to Pop-Up Displays
section for further explanation.
There must be 4 characters in the
configuration name. Use the space
symbol ( _ ) to fill any open characters.
ANOTHER INSTRUMENT
Once an instrument has been programmed
to meet technical and clinical needs, the
settings can be transferred to other
instruments. The programmed instrument is
referred to as the "Teacher" and the other
instrument is referred to as the "Learner".
NOTE: Only the configuration settings will be
transferred. The instrument ID number,
periodic maintenance settings, and other
settings from the diagnostics mode will not be
transferred.
Connect a standard 9-pin Null Modem
RS-232 cable (ALARIS P/N 133450) to the
RS-232 ports on the instruments.
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument
Procedure
NOTE: The Learn/Teach function will not
work if the revision level for Learn/Teach is
not the same on both instruments. It is not
recommended to Learn/Teach different
model families; such as, using a Model
7130/7230 to Learn/Teach a Model
7131/7231.
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
A B
OPTIONS
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Config. Name= IVAC
undo ok enter
2B-16
Signature Edition

ANOTHER INSTRUMENT (Continued)
2.5.1 Learn/Teach Instrument
Procedure (Continued)
1. Access Configuration Mode for both
"teacher" and "learner" instruments and
advance to page C5.
2. Press Teach soft key of "teacher"
instrument and Press the Learn soft key
of "learner" instrument.
3. Press start soft key on "teacher"
instrument.
Downloading displays until transfer is
complete, and then displays if transfer
was successful or unsuccessful.
NOTES:
Repeat allows the operator to
reattempt teaching the current
instrument or to teach the next
instrument.
Reattach the cover, and/or cover and
screws, over RS-232 port after
disconnecting the cable.
2.5.2 Pop-Up Displays
The pop-up screens appear when an
attempt is made to turn off an instrument or
execute the teach mode after changing the
configuration (or accessing a configured
item) but not changing the configuration
name. If the instrument's configuration is
changed and not the configuration name,
instruments with the same name may have
different configurations. The pop-up menus
ask if the configuration should be renamed.
Learn: Rev. 01.20
Teach: Rev. 01.20
5
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
5
Teach Status
Awaiting Start
BFFF IVAC
cancel start
A B
OPTIONS
C
Configuration has
Press POWER key
cancel rename
A B
OPTIONS
C
been changed.
to keep name IVAC.
Configuration has
Press teach key
to keep name IVAC.
cancel rename
A B
OPTIONS
C
been changed.
teach
Signature Edition

2B-17
2.6 RESISTANCE OPTIONS
Resistance Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of resistance in the line while
Resistance Alert: Provides an early
warning of increases in downstream flow
resistance by allowing the level to be
adjusted in 5% increments during operation.
Default Alert: Provides a starting point for
occlusion detection if a different level has
not been chosen. The selected level will
remain in effect while the instrument is on,
until another option is selected from the
Monitoring Options page. The channel will
retain the selected option up to six hours
after the instrument is turned off. After six
hours the channel will return to the default
setting.
Alarm: Provides the option to lower the
pressure occlusion setting that is still active,
even in resistance modes.
2. Press Resist Display soft key to select
On and Off.
NOTE: Setting Resist Display to Off will
clear Default Alert from the screen and
change Resist Alert to Off.
3. Press Resist Alert soft key to select for
On and Off.
NOTES:
Setting Resist Alert to Off will clear
Default Alert from the screen.
Resistance alert will give an alarm tone
every thirty seconds, with a popup
display (on for 4 seconds, off for 6
seconds). Nurse call activated. This
occurs when the resistance
measurement is above the alert
threshold or at 100%, even when
checking the line. If the display is off,
the alert feature will automatically be
turned off.
4. Press Default Alert soft key to select for
then press Enter. The instrument will
round up or down to the nearest 5%
increment.
NOTE: To set the Default Alert level,
both Resist Display and Resist Alert
need to be On.
Enter.
Resist Display= On
Resist Alert = On
Alarm = 600 mmHg
undo
ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Learn: Rev. 01.20
Teach: Rev. 01.20
5
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
2B-18
Signature Edition

2.7 PRESSURE OPTIONS
Pressure Display: Provides a bar graph
and indication of pressure in the line while
Pressure Alarm: Allows the choice of a
fixed pressure mode or an adjustable
pressure mode.
Adjustable Pressure: Provides an early
warning of increases in downstream
pressure. Designed to monitor IV
line/site based on pressure, and provide
user- adjustable pressure alarm limits.
and special applications; such as infusion
through transducers, into dialysis
catheters).
Fixed Pressure: Designed to monitor IV
line/site pressure and alarm, based on a
fixed pressure limit of 600 mmHg. Used
when adjustable pressure is not wanted.
catheters).
Alarm: Provides an adjustable pressure
setting in 25 mmHg increments (25-600
range). This acts as the default setting after
the instrument has been off for more than
6 hours and the previous setting was
cleared. Pressure Alarm = Adj must be
selected to change from 600 mmHg.
Auto Baseline: The instrument reads a
baseline at startup and then adds the alarm
limit, to determine the point of alarm. For
example, if an alarm limit of 300 mmHg was
selected, the instrument would alarm at
baseline + 300 mmHg. Auto Zeroing occurs
the first time RUN/HOLD is pressed; this will
be the maximum baseline. Subsequent
presses of RUN/HOLD will only lower (not
raise) the baseline.
Manual Baseline: Sets a fixed baseline
and overrides the Auto Zero level until the
instrument is turned off, the latch is opened,
the set is reloaded, or the pressure baseline
function is performed again. This allows the
instrument to display the actual pressure
required for an IV to infuse. To get this real
time readout, Manual Baseline must be
On.
To activate this mode with the instrument on
hold, or at startup, press the Options key
and then select Set Pressure Baseline and
press ok.
When RUN/HOLD is pressed, the bar graph
will show the alarm point and the actual
pressure in the line will be displayed below
the bar graph.
Pressure Dsply= On
Pressure Alarm= Adj
Alarm = 600 mmHg
Manual Baseline=On
undo ok
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Learn: Rev. 01.20
Teach: Rev. 01.20
5
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Signature Edition

2B-19
2.7 PRESSURE OPTIONS (Continued)
2. Press Pressure Dsply soft key to select
On and Off.
3. Press Pressure Alarm soft key to select
Adj and Fix.
Enter. Instrument will round up or down
to nearest 25 mmHg increment.
5. Press Manual Baseline soft key to select
On and Off.
2B-20
Signature Edition

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
Instrument ID/Serial #
Config Name
(Instr Label)
Location
Language
Air-In-Line:
Threshold
Reset
Accumulator
l l l l l
Dose Rate Drugs (See Table 2-4 Drug List )
Maximum Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h
Computer Link:
Mode
Baud Rate
Parity
Optional Modes:
Loading Dose
Dose Rate
Multi-Step
Multi-Dose
Optional Features
Panel Lock
VTBI
Multi-Dose Alert
KVO Rate mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h mL/h
Table 2-3. Record of Configured Instruments
--- Table Continued on Next Page ---
Signature Edition

2B-21
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
Monitoring Options:
Mode
Restarts
Trends
Audio:
Volume
Trans. Tone
Resistance Options:
Resist Display
Resist Alarm
Default Alarm
Alarm
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
%
mmHg
Pressure Options:
Pressure Display
Pressure Alarm
Alarm
Manual Baseline
mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg mmHg

Instrument ID/Serial # is accessed through Diagnostic Mode. Refer to the Entering Diagnostic
Mode section in the Troubleshooting chapter.
Table 2-3. Record of Configured Instruments (Continued)
2B-22
Signature Edition

DRUG NAME/OPTION TRADE NAME NOT SELECTED SHORT LIST EXTENDED LIST
Extended List Access
DRUG?
Alfentanil Alfenta
Alprostadil Prostin (PGE-1)
Alteplase Activase
AminoPhylline
Amrinone Inocar
Atracurium Tracurium
Bretylium Bretylol
Cimetidine Tagamet
Diltiazem Cardizem
Dobutamine Dobutrex
Dopamine Intropin
Esmolol Brevibloc
Heparin
Isoproterenol Isuprel
Labetalol Normodyne /Trandate
Lidocaine Xylocaine
Magnesium Sulfate
Methylprednisolone
Milrinone
Morphine
Nytroglycerin Tridil
Nitroprusside Nipride
Norepinephrine Levophed
Ocytocin
Phenlyphrine Neo-Synephrine
Potassium Chlor
Procainamide
Propofol Dipravan
Ranitidine Zantac
Streptokinase Streptase
Succinylcholine Anectine
Theophylline
Urokinase Abbokinase
Vecuronium Norcuron
Facility:
Unit:
Table 2-4. Drug List Configuration
Signature Edition

2B-23
OPTIONS
CONFIGURATION MODE
Config.: BFFF IVAC
C
page
1
ID No. : 001234567
SW Rev.: 02.78
A B
Set To Defaults
Language
Air In Line
Dose Rate Drugs
C
2
page
OPTIONS
A B
OPTIONS

default values
C
ok
2
configuration
items to their
A B
cancel
Set All
Language=
English 2
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
C
A B
Threshold=
Air In Line
Reset= Off
Accumulator= On
2
undo ok
100 mcL
OPTIONS
C
A B
OPTIONS
Dose Rate Drugs
( ) = not displayed
C
page
2
(s) = short list
(e) = extended list
A B
done
3
Maximum Rate
Computer Link
Optional Modes
Optional Features
page
OPTIONS
C
A B
C
3
OPTIONS
Maximum Rate =
999.9 mL/hr
ok
A B
2B-24
Signature Edition

Mode = Off
Baud Rate = 9600
Parity = None
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
ok undo
3
Dose Rate = On
Multi-Step = Off
Multi-Dose = Off
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Loading Dose On
Panel Lock= On
VTBI= On
undo ok
3
OPTIONS
C
A B
KVO Rate
Monitoring Options
Audio
Configuration Name
page
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
KVO Rate =
5.0 mL/hr
undo ok
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
4
Mode= Pressure
Restarts= 3
Trends= On
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Monitoring Options
Audio
Volumes = Low Med Hi
undo ok
4
OPTIONS
C
A B
Trans. Tones = On
4
A B
OPTIONS
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
Config. Name= IVAC
undo ok enter
Signature Edition

2B-25
Learn: Rev. 01.20
Teach: Rev. 01.20
5
page
A B
OPTIONS
C
Resistance Options
Pressure Options
Learn Status
cancel
5
OPTIONS
C
A B
Awaiting Download
5
Teach Status
Awaiting Start
BFFF IVAC
cancel start
A B
OPTIONS
C
5
Resistance Alert = On
Alarm = 600 mmHg
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Resistance Display = On
5
Pressure Alarm = Adj
Alarm = 600 mmHg
Manual Baseline = On
ok
OPTIONS
C
undo
A B
Pressure Display = On
2B-26
Signature Edition

THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
3
P
R
E
V
E
N
T
I
V
E

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Chapter 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3-1
3.1 INTRODUCTION
To ensure the Signature Edition
GOLD
Infusion System remains in good operating
condition, regular and preventive
maintenance inspections are required.
Regular inspections must be performed by
hospital/facility before each use.
Preventive maintenance inspections should
be performed once a year in accordance
with ALARIS Medical Systems requirements
and guidelines. A maintenance reminder will
occur after 52 weeks, unless the feature has
been changed to select a different time
interval or has been disabled. These
inspections are also intended to complement
the intent of J CAHO requirements.
Use Table 3-1, "PM Inspections," to record
the completion of preventive maintenance
inspections.
3.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
INSPECTIONS
A message can be set through the
diagnostics mode which automatically
reminds the user when preventive
maintenance inspections are due. Refer to
"Setting Preventive Maintenance Interval"
section in the Troubleshooting chapter.
3.2.1 Regular Inspection
Regular inspections consist of a visual
inspection for damage and cleanliness, and
performing the procedure described in the
Start-Up section of the Directions for Use
(DFU), before each usage of the instrument.
Failure to perform regular and preventive
maintenance inspections may result in improper
instrument operation.
WARNING
Signature Edition

INSPECTIONS (Continued)
3.2.1 Regular Inspection (Continued)
Case
Examine the instrument for overall
condition. The case should be clean and
free from IV solution residue, especially
near moving parts. Also check for dried
solution deposits on accessible areas of air-
in-line sensor, pressure transducer, and
latch mechanism. Check that labels and
markings are legible.
Mounting Bracket
Pole mounting bracket should be secure
and functioning. If the instrument is
mounted on a pole or stand, examine the
condition of the mount. Also, examine the
pole and stand.
Power Cord Assembly
Examine the power cord assembly for:
Signs of damage, cuts or deformities in
the cord. If damaged, replace the entire
cord.
Integrity of hospital grade power plug.
Attempt to wiggle blades to ensure they
are secure. If any damage is suspected,
replace entire cord.
Appropriate tension and connection.
Applicable only if IV pole has electrical
receptacles for accessories.
Strain reliefs. Examine strain reliefs at
both ends of line cord. Be sure they hold
cord securely.
Keypad
Check membrane switches for damage,
such as from fingernails and pens. During
the course of the inspection, be sure to
check that each switch performs its proper
function. Refer to "Testing Switches" section
of the Troubleshooting chapter.
Mechanism
Clean any surfaces where solution or
obstructions have accumulated. Verify:
Mechanism seal is not torn or worn.
Cam followers are not broken or cracked
and are free of foreign matter.
Proper operation of latching mechanism.
Cam followers should retract and extend
smoothly.
Air-in-line arm moves smoothly from
opened to closed position.
Fluid Control Actuator rotates 180.
3.2.2 Functional Test
1. Turn instrument on without set installed.
Verify it "beeps" and red alarm light
flashes.
2. Set infusion rate to 460 mL/h and VTBI to
100 mL.
3. Press RUN/HOLD switch with latch
closed, and rate and VTBI 0 to cause
"set out" and "air in line" messages.
4. Open latch.
5. Install primed administration set with
latch open.
6. Verify instrument displays "air in line" and
"latch open" messages.
7. Close latch and verify display returns to
setup page.
8. Perform upstream occlusion test as
follows:
a. Verify infusion rate is set to 460 mL/h.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3-2
Signature Edition

3.2.2 Functional Test (Continued)
b. With instrument on hold, or at start-up,
verify primary VTBI is set to 100.
c. Press RUN/HOLD switch to begin
infusion.
d. Clamp off IV line just above
instrument to simulate an upstream
occlusion. Verify instrument stops
running, alarms, and displays
OCCLUSION UPSTREAM within 60
seconds.
e. Press RUN/HOLD switch to silence
alarm and put instrument on hold.
f. Remove or open clamp on line.
g. Press RUN/HOLD switch to resume
infusion. Alarm should not reoccur.
9. Perform downstream occlusion test as
follows:
a. Continue infusing from above step.
b. Verify rate is set to 460 mL/h. Clamp
off set just below instrument.
c. Allow instrument to run until it alarms
OCCLUSION DOWNSTREAM within
60 seconds.
d. Press RUN/HOLD switch to silence
alarm and put instrument on hold.
e. Release or open clamp.
f. Press RUN/HOLD switch to resume
infusion. Alarm should not reoccur.
3.2.3 Flow Stop Test
1. Turn power off with administration set
primed and loaded in instrument.
2. With all tubing clamps open and fluid
container 2 or more feet above
instrument, verify no fluid flows out of set.
3. Remove set. Verify no fluid flows out of
set.
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure
To maintain system accuracy, the rate
calibration should be done first, followed by
a verification rate test, when doing
Preventive Maintenance or post repair
testing.
1. Change Cal #to "0.0" to run rate
calibration and calculate a new
calibration number.
NOTES:
Once the Rate Cal #is set to "0.0" and
accepted, the instrument will need to be
run for at least two seconds before the
Rate Cal #can be changed to a non-
zero value. If not, the instrument will
display Do Rate Accuracy Test at 0%.
The instrument will not allow one non-
zero value to be changed to another
non-zero value.
Rate Calibration is run at the nominal
value (0.0%) so that the percentage
can be directly entered in the
instrument without another calculation.
2. Run rate calibration (using an 80VCS
set) at 400 mL/h, with a VTBI of 40 mL
and VI reset to zero. Follow procedure in
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification section, steps 1-23, and then
determine rate calibration number (in %),
as shown below.
3-3
Signature Edition

3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure (Continued)
Calculate volume accuracy as follows:
Volumetric Volume Accuracy
Error Computation
Vcollected =
volume in burette in milliliters
Vexpected =
characterized volume printed on
80VCS set insert
Step 1:
A =Vcollected / Vexpected
Step 2:
B =A x 100
Step 3:
% Error (Round % Error to nearest
tenth of a percent.) =B - 100
NOTES:
The range of the percent error can be
from -5.3 to +15.6%, based on
mechanism to mechanism differences
and performing the initial run for
calibration at 0.0%.
In addition to performing this process
during Preventive Maintenance, this
process would also apply when
replacing a mechanism or installing a
new main board assembly.
3. Do not remove 80VCS set from
instrument until one of following is
determined:
Instrument has passed Post
Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification and calibration is not
needed.
Rate calibration number was
changed and instrument now passes
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification.
Mechanism replacement is required.
4. Reverse sign (+/- ) of % Error value from
Rate Calibration results in step 3.
Example:
Result is 4% high (+4%). Reverse the
sign (to get -4%). Number to enter for
Rate Cal #is -4%.
NOTES:
In the example above, the new Rate
Cal #tells the instrument to count more
volume per revolution of the
mechanism, so that the output will be
less due to fewer revolutions.
The limits for the rate calibration entry
are -15.6 to +5.3%, to adjust for
differences from mechanism to
mechanism. If the Rate Cal #is outside
this range, then the mechanism needs
to be replaced.
5. Enter new Rate Cal #for applicable
channel using keypad and bottom center
soft key (+/- ) for sign. Press ENTER.
NOTES:
Make sure the "+/- " sign is used with
the percent change when doing rate
calibration.
To change the rate calibration number,
refer to Viewing/Changing Rate
Calibration Information section in
3-4
Signature Edition

Water source
3-5
3.2.4 Rate Calibration Procedure (Continued)
6. Press ok soft key to accept change and
return to beginning of D4 page.
NOTE: When the main board is changed,
the Rate Cal #defaults to 100% and 0.0
mL/rev. Reset the Rate Cal #to "0.0%" or
previous Cal #, to clear an Instrument
Malfunction message.
3.2.5 Post Calibration Rate Accuracy
Verification
Perform the following steps without
removing the 80VCS set or turning the
instrument off.
Due to the Dynamic Monitoring
Feature,
the rate is varied during operation. For this
reason, ALARIS Medical Systems does not
recommend using automatic testers to
check rate accuracy. Generally, these
devices collect small samples and may
cause results to be incorrect, even though
the instrument is accurate.
It is recommended, with the initial use of the
80VCS set on each instrument, to perform
rate calibration first, to save time.
Do not use the Model 80VCS Calibration
Set for more than 15 rate calibration and
post calibration rate accuracy verifications
(count one use for both calibration and
verification of the same instrument).
CAUTION
Figure 3-1. Rate Accuracy Test Setup
Table or
Bench
Equipment
Stand
Burette
Clamp
Burette
(50 mL)
Tubing
IV Tubing
Used Fluid
Receptacle
Three-
Way
Stopcock
80VCS
Rate Cal Set
Instrument Stand
30 +2 inches
Signature Edition

3-6
Verification (Continued)
Keep track of the number of times the set is
used by recording each use on the 80VCS
insert or on a separate record.
1. Fill solution container with clean tap
water. Close AccuSlide
Flow Regulator
clamp on 80VCS Calibration Set and
then insert spike into solution container.
2. Open AccuSlide
Flow Regulator clamp

and prime set. Pay particular attention to
ensure all air is expelled from set. Close
AccuSlide
Flow Regulator clamp.

3. Connect output of set to one side of
three-way stopcock.
4. Load set into instrument.
5. Close latch.
6. Verify there is no fluid flow or drops
falling in drip chamber.
7. Plug instrument into a properly grounded
AC outlet.
8. Set stopcock to output into a class A or B
burette.
9. Press POWER to turn channel on.
10. Set primary infusion rate to 400 mL/h.
11. Set VTBI to 20 mL.
12. Ensure instrument (both channels if dual
channel) is set to Pressure mode.
NOTE: The factory default for the
Monitoring Options mode is Pressure.
13. Press RUN/HOLD to start primary
infusion. Infuse until tubing and burette
are fully primed (approximately 1 minute).
14. Press RUN/HOLD to stop infusion.
15. Adjust height of instrument and/or fluid
container to attain a head height of 30 1
inches / 76.2 2.5 centimeters between
middle of pumping mechanism and fluid
level in either the:
NOTE: A 30" head height was used in
the initial qualification of this process and
is the recommended head height. Based
on observed field use, a 24" head height
was also tested and verified for the Rate
Accuracy Specification.
bag or vented bottle (vent closed on
administration set)
or
drip chamber (unvented bottle with
vent open on administration set).
16. Adjust fluid level in burette until meniscus
is level with zero mark on burette.
NOTE: The instrument may need to be
run to prime the line to the zero level of
the burette (step 13).
17. Verify primary infusion rate is 400 mL/h.
18. Reset VTBI to 40 mL and clear volume
infused.
19. Press RUN/HOLD to start primary
infusion.
20. Instrument will run approximately 360
seconds (6 minutes) to complete delivery
and then go into KVO mode. Stop
instrument within 1 second of its entering
KVO mode.
21. Make a note of volume collected in
burette.
22. Note expected volume, as identified on
80VCS calibration set insert.
Signature Edition

3-7
Verification (Continued)
23. Do not remove 80VCS set from
instrument until one of following is
determined:
Instrument has passed rate
verification and calibration is not
needed.
Rate calibration number was changed
and instrument now passes
verification.
Mechanism replacement is required.
24. Calculate volume accuracy as follows:
Volumetric Volume Accuracy
Error Computation
Vcollected =volume in burette in mL
Vexpected =characterized volume
printed on 80VCS set insert
Step 1: A =Vcollected ' Vexpected
Step 2: B =A x 100
Step 3: % Error (Round % Error to
nearest tenth of a percent.) =B - 100
25. Result should be 0.01%.
26. If volume accuracy does not fall within
required range of 1% from expected
volume and test results were:
inside a range of -5.5 to +7.0% from
expected volume, perform "Rate
Calibration Procedure". Set rate
calibration number to 0.0% before
running rate test, to determine a new
calibration number.
outside a range of -5.5 to +7.0% from
expected volume, return instrument to
ALARIS Medical Systems for repair or
replace mechanism.
27. Set stopcock to drain fluid in burette to
zero level, in preparation for next test.
NOTE: If additional low rate (5 to 20 mL/h)
testing is desired, use an 80VCS set and
collect at least 6 mL of fluid. The results
should be 5% of the expected output. At
lower rates (less than 5 mL/h),
evaporation may need to be prevented or
accounted for in the results. Calibration
must be performed at 400 mL/h and
collecting 40 mL of fluid.
3.2.6 Pressure Calibration
1. Place instrument on bench or other flat
surface and connect to AC power.
2. Connect pressure meter, pressure
source, and reservoir to pressure
calibration set. Refer to Figure 3-2
"Pressure Test Setup".
3. Install a pressure cal set (70ISS) into
instrument.
4. Enter Diagnostics Mode by pressing and
holding top soft key, then turn instrument
on and release soft key when diagnostics
display appears. Refer to "Entering
Diagnostics Mode" section in
Signature Edition

3.2.6 Pressure Calibration (Continued)
5. Advance to D6 page by pressing page soft
key 5 times.
On D6 page, press Cal A Pressure or Cal
B Pressure (dual channel). D6A or D6B
will be displayed, depending on which
channel was selected.
6. Adjust pressure to "0 mmHg" from test
fixture. Press and release 0 mmHg soft key.
If readings are in a valid range, it will display
Pass.
7. Apply 500 mmHg (2 mmHg) from test
fixture. Press and release 500 mmHg soft
key. If readings are in a valid range, it will
display Pass.
8. Remove 500 mmHg pressure applied to
instrument, then remove set.
9. Press ok soft key to accept calibration and
return to main D6 page.
10. Set sensor check/calibration verification:
a. Press Cal A Pressure or Cal B Pressure
(dual) soft key to re-enter the same Cal
Pressure screen.
b. Verify both 0 mmHg and 500 mmHg
readings display Pass.
c. Install a standard set and close latch.
Verify reading is over 170.
3-8
PSI
mmHg
0 775
Figure 3-2. Pressure Test Setup
Cal A Pressure
DAC A Settings
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
page
6
A B
OPTIONS
D
Air Pressure Source
0 - 500 mmHg
Instrument
Stand
70ISS Pressure
Calibration Set
Reservoir
Pressure
Gauge
Signature Edition

3.2.6 Pressure Calibration (Continued)
d. Remove set. Verify Sensor = reading is
in -80 to +30 mmHg range without set
installed. If instrument will not soft cal,
perform Hard Pressure Cal Procedure
(Corrective Maintenance chapter).
3.2.7 Ground Current Leakage Test

3.2.8 Ground Resistance Test

3.2.9 Battery Refresh Cycle
METHOD ONE
1. Connect instrument to AC power.
2. Enter Diagnostics mode by holding top
left soft key while powering instrument
on.
3. Press page soft key (bottom right) to
advance to D2 page.
4. Press lower left soft key to access
Battery Status screen.
5. Press lower left soft key to highlight
Rated Cap value.
6. Using numeric keypad, enter 0.0 (in
Rated Cap value).
7. Press the ok soft key (bottom right).
8. Repeat step 4 to access 'Battery Status'.
9. Repeat step 5 to highlight Rated Cap
value.
10. Using numeric keypad, enter 1.3 in Rated
Cap.
11. Press ok soft key.
12. Press and hold POWER key for a second
to power instrument down.
Battery Refresh procedure has been
initiated and will continue to run until
complete, whether instrument is on or off,
generally 12 to 24 hours. Instrument
needs to be connected to AC power
during this period. Disconnecting
instrument from AC power will stop
refresh cycle.
METHOD TWO
1. Disconnect instrument from AC power.
2. Disconnect battery from instrument.
3. Press and hold POWER key for
5 seconds.
4. Reconnect battery and connect
instrument to AC power.
Battery Refresh procedure has been
initiated and will continue to run until
complete, whether instrument is on or off,
generally 12 to 24 hours. Instrument
needs to be connected to AC power
during this period. Disconnecting
instrument from AC power will stop
refresh cycle.
3-9
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Sensor=+001 Pass
6
ok
0 mmHg=1100 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Signature Edition

3-10
3.2.10 Reset Time
1. Enter Diagnostic Mode and advance to
D2 page.
2. Reset hours and minutes as needed from
time reference. Refer to Setting Time
(and Date) in the Troubleshooting
chapter.
NOTE: Clock will lose about 3 minutes
per month since it is not a true real-time
clock. Once reset, the previous loop will
not be affected or adjusted.
3.2.11 Reset PM Due
Enter Diagnostic Mode and go to D2 page.
Access PM Setup and reset PM Due by
pressing lower-left soft key.
3.3 STORAGE AND CLEANING

3.3.1 Storage
The instrument may be stored without
connection to AC power. It will automatically
disconnect the battery when the voltage
gets too low. To reuse the instrument after
storage, connect it to AC power for a
minimum of three (3) hours before placing it
back into service. When temporarily taking
the instrument out of service, connect it to
AC power to ensure a fully charged battery
when needed.
Signature Edition

3-11
Table 3-1. PM Inspections
I.D. Number Instrument Serial Number
Ref.
Section
Frequency Date Completed Date Completed
Regular Inspection
(record every 12 months)
3.2.1 Every Use
Functional Test 3.2.2 12 Months
Flow Stop Test 3.2.3 12 Months
Rate Calibration Procedure 3.2.4 12 Months
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification
3.2.5 12 Months
Pressure Calibration 3.2.6 12 Months
Ground Current Leakage Test 3.2.7 12 Months
Ground Resistance Test 3.2.8 12 Months
Battery Refresh Cycle 3.2.9 12 Months
Reset Time 3.2.10 12 Months
I.D. Number Instrument Serial Number
Ref.
Section
Frequency Date Completed Date Completed
Regular Inspection
(record every 12 months)
3.2.1 Every Use
Functional Test 3.2.2 12 Months
Flow Stop Test 3.2.3 12 Months
Rate Calibration Procedure 3.2.4 12 Months
Post Calibration Rate Accuracy Verification
3.2.5 12 Months
Pressure Calibration 3.2.6 12 Months
Ground Current Leakage Test 3.2.7 12 Months
Ground Resistance Test 3.2.8 12 Months
Battery Refresh Cycle 3.2.9 12 Months
Reset Time 3.2.10 12 Months
Signature Edition

3-12
THI S PAGE
I NTE NTI ONALLY
LE F T BLANK
Signature Edition

4
P
R
I
N
C
I
P
L
E
S

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the mechanical and
electrical systems that comprise the Signature
Edition
GOLD Infusion System.

4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION
The main PCB for both the single and dual
channel instrument is a double-sided multi-
layered Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
board. If a board is determined to have failed,
it can be replaced or the instrument can be
returned to ALARIS Medical Systems for
repair. ALARIS Medical Systems does not
provide replacement components for repair of
SMT boards nor does ALARIS Medical
Systems recommend attempting field service
of the instrument's SMT circuit boards.
Full board assembly schematics are not
included with this service manual.
The AC off-line switcher and RS-232 boards
are replaced as an assembly. If a board is
determined to have failed, it is replaced with a
new board (for part number refer to Illustrated
Parts Breakdown chapter). ALARIS Medical
Systems does not provide replacement
components for repair of these boards.
Both single and dual channel instruments
function in the same manner; however, they
use two different main PCBs. The component
reference designations are therefore different
for each board. To help distinguish between
the single and dual channel instrument
reference designations in this chapter, the
dual channel instrument will be represented in
parenthesis; for example, (U13).
Chapter 4 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
4-1
Signature Edition

4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION (Continued)
The instrument contains a peristaltic
pumping mechanism and support circuitry to
ensure controlled flow. The peristaltic
mechanism consists of a linear array of 12
cam followers which travel perpendicular to
the administration set. These cam followers
act like "fingers" kneading the membrane.
When the fluid-filled disposable is placed
against the array of cam followers, the
coordinated, sinusoidal motion of the cams
causes a peristaltic wave of fluid
displacement in the instrumenting segment
of the disposable.
The instrument will alarm at signs of
internal problems and at preset thresholds
for external problems (for example, when
battery charge falls below a critical level, or
instrument output pressure exceeds a
programmed limit). All alarms provide visual
and auditory signals to alert the operator.
Accuracy of fluid delivery is a function of the
microprocessor-controlled rotation cycle of
the camshaft, and the administration set
section compressed by the cam followers.
4.3 OVERVIEW
The instrument contains one main PCB and
several modules that interface to it. The
interfacing modules are as follows:
LED module
Graphic LCD module (MAIN)
Lower LCD module
Battery
AC off-line switcher
Keypad
Nurse Call / RS-232 board
Motor
Air-in-line sensors
Pressure module
Motor rotation sensor and mechanism
latch detector (optocouplers)
ECD board
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
4-2
Figure 4-1. Main Block Diagram
Signature Edition

AC
OFFLINE
SWITCHER
BATTERY
CHARGER
DC/DC
POWER
SUPPLY
LOWER
LCD
WATCHDOG
MOTOR/
CONTROL
MECH
TAMP
SW
KEY
PAD
LED
MAIN
LCD
SPKR
TEST
MAIN
SPKR
SPKR
TEST
BKUP
SPKR
AUDIO
AMP
VBKUP
1.0F
5.5V
SUPER CAP
PRESS
SENSOR
ADC
VCC
ADREF
RS232
AIL
COMBO
IC
32 Mhz
Y1
CPU / EPROM
EEPROM / RAM
CPU KERNEL
BATTERY
MANAGER
L
L
+
ECD
4.3 OVERVIEW (Continued)
The instrument power is supplied through
the AC off-line switcher module and the
battery.
The main PCB contains all the control
circuitry required for the instrument. The
board can be broken down into four main
sections, as follows:
CPU Kernel
The microprocessor, RAM, ROM, data
communication, and COMBO IC make
up the heart of the system. These are
collectively referred to as the CPU
kernel. The CPU kernel is responsible
for controlling the motor actuation,
sensing and responding to user input,
monitoring various system sensors, and
performing start-up and ongoing system
operational testing.
Power System
The power system is responsible for
charging the battery, generating the DC
power, displaying battery status and
performing watchdog (clock sync checks)
functions. The power system includes
the Battery Manager custom IC.
Motor Drive and Sensor Control
The motor drive and sensor control
circuitry drives the motors, the air-in-line
sensors, the mechanism latch sensors,
and the rotation sensors. The circuit is
also responsible for monitoring the
pressure sensors, the power supply
voltages, the motor current, and the air-
in-line sensor outputs.
User Interface Circuitry
The user interface circuitry connects to
the keypad, LED modules, and LCD
modules to the kernel circuitry for
monitoring and control. This circuitry
also contains the audio interface, and
audio test.
4.4 MAIN PCB
4.4.1 CPU Kernel
The CPU kernel is responsible for
controlling the motor actuation, sensing and
responding to user input, monitoring various
system sensors, and performing start-up
and on-going system operational testing.
The kernel is based on a 16-bit 80C188
microprocessor U11 (U15), 1Mbytes of
Flash EEPROM program storage, and 128K
bytes of battery backed up RAM data
storage. In addition, the kernel has 2K bits
of EEPROM memory and a selectable
baud rate for serial communications
interface.
The COMBO IC U10 (U14) is a custom
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated
Circuit) which incorporates timing, address
decoding, digital I/O, and other system
"glue" functions. The Combo IC has a 16-
bit CRC generator which is used to
periodically test the Flash EEPROM data.
The COMBO IC also contains the local
serial interface control logic used to
interface to serially-accessed peripherals,
such as the A/D, EEPROM, LED Module(s),
and Battery Manager. Additional information
can be found in the section below "COMBO
IC".
4-3
Signature Edition

4.4 MAIN PCB (Continued)
4.4.1 CPU Kernel (Continued)
The kernel data communications function
supports RS-232 level serial
communications up to 19200 baud. The
UART function is embedded in the COMBO
IC, while the RS-232 interface is based on
an industry standard RS-232 level converter
chip.
4.4.2 COMBO IC
The COMBO IC, U10 (U14), is a 160-pin
PQFP device which supports a variety of
kernel functions, primary audio support,
digital I/O and other functions. The COMBO
latches the address bus and outputs the
latched addresses as A19-A16, and A7-A0.
The COMBO lC has a 16-bit CRC generator
which is used to periodically test the Flash
EEPROM data. The RAMTEST circuit
provides redundant storage and error
detection of RAM data. The local serial
interface control logic is used to interface
with serial accessed peripherals; such as
the A/D converter, EEPROM, LED
Module(s), and Battery Manager. The
device also generates the Main LCD
interface control signals. The UART (Intel
8251 equivalent) and three 16-bit counters
(Intel 8254 equivalent) are also provided
inside the COMBO chip. Six pulse width
modulators for motor control and LCD
backlight and contrast are also within the
custom IC.
4.4.3 EEPROM
The EEPROM is used to store all
configuration and diagnostic settings. The
EEPROM, U9 (U11) is accessed using the
serial control unit within the COMBO IC.
Data is written and read back from the
device through the serial data registers
within the COMBO chip.
This device holds 256, 16-bit words. It is
used to store data that will not be destroyed
if power is lost to the instrument. The
EEPROM will store configuration mode,
calibration (LCD contrast) settings, and
certain diagnostic information e.g.,
instrument ID number, PM interval, PM
on/off, battery run time, and total instrument
run time.
NOTE: The Guardrails
CQI log and Event

Log are NOT stored in the EEPROM.
4.4.4 RAM
The RAM is used to store user set
parameters, for example, volume to be
infused (VTBI), mode, rate, and PRI/SEC,
as well as the logs. The instrument
provides read/write memory integrity by
using redundant storage and automatic
comparison. Data written to RAM is stored
in both of the RAM devices, main RAM, U8
(U9), and phantom RAM, U4 (U5). The
processor reads data directly from the main
RAM. The phantom RAM data only goes to
the COMBO IC. The COMBO IC compares
the data from the two RAMs on each read.
If the data does not match, a bit will be set
in a register within the COMBO IC.
4-4
Signature Edition

4-5
4.4.4 RAM (Continued)
When the instrument is off, the VRAM
supply is still on, preserving the contents of
the RAMs. The second chip select line,
CS2, of the RAMs is tied to RST_CPU*, so
that the RAMs can not be selected during
power down sequence.
4.4.5 Flash EEPROM
The Flash EEPROM, U42 (U48), contains
1M bytes (x8) of program memory. The
Flash EEPROM is programmed through the
RS-232 interface.
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface
7130/7230 Models
The RS-232 serial communications interface
is supported by a UART which is located
inside the COMBO IC. The UART is
equivalent to an Intel 8251. The UART's
outputs drive interface U22 (U45), which
converts the logic level signals to RS-232
levels. The system can support up to 19200
baud rate.
The communications channel is EMI filtered
and ESD protected to 10 kV with
components on the RS-232/Nurse Call
board and is not electrically isolated. The
interface supports two signals (TxD and
RxD) along with ground.
Figure 4-2. COMBO IC Block Diagram
Audio Tone
Generator
Motor Timer
Chan A
Motor Timer
Chan B
Motor PWM
Chan A
Motor PWM
Chan B
LCD PWM
Data CRC
Generator
LCD Bus
Interface
RAM Test
Circuit
Output Ports
UART
PWM1, PWM1_OUT6-5
PWM0, PWM0_OUT6-5
LCD-D7-0
LCD-CS1-0
LCD_RS
LCD_EN
LCD_WR
Background
Irp Timer
Main CPU
PWM3, PWM3_OUT6-5
PWM2, PWM2_OUT6-5
PMW5 (LCD Contrast)
PMW4 (LCD Backlight)
DMARQ0
PD7-0
PH_EN
RAMCS
OUT-27-20
OUT-36-34
TXD
BKGND_IRPT
TIMER1_OUT
TIMER0_OUT
AMP3-0
Audio Tone
Generator
Kernel Bus
Interface
Input
Ports
IN-07-00
IN-17-10
IN-33-30
A19-16
A191-161
A7-0
AD7-0
osc
X1
Signature Edition

Channel A
Info & Data Disp
128x64 Dot Matrix
Controller IC
LED Backlight
Keypad
27 keys
(1 chan pump)
32 keys
(2 chan pump)
Rate & State
Indicators
8x7 LED Matrix
Drive & Test
5x8 Keypad Interface
Lower LCD Display
Battery Gauge Bargraph
4 Alphanumeric Characters
3 Audio icons
Computer Crt/mon icons
Tamper icons
Rate & State
Indicators
8x7 LED Matrix
Drive & Test
5x8 Keypad Interface
Kernel
80C188 CPU
Flash EPROM
128KB RAM
32MHz Xtal
Audio
Amplifier
Combo IC
Motor Current Logic
Serial Intf Controller
RAM Test Logic
ROM CRC Logic
LCD Interface Logic
Audio Tone Generator
Master Timebase
Motor Timing Logic
Sensor Interface
UART
RS232 HDWR
19200 Baud
RS232 Compatible
EEPROM
2K bit
A/D Converter
12 Bit Resolution
8 Input Multiplexor
Air In
Line
Interface
Pressure
Sensor
Interface
Pressure
Sensor
Interface
Motor Control
PWM Stepper Interface
Motor Current Sense
Rotation Flag Interface
Latch Sensor Interface
Motor Control
PWM Stepper Interface
Motor Current Sense
Rotation Flag Interface
Latch Sensor Interface
MechanismAssembly
Stepper Motor
Sensors
Rotation Flag
AIL Sensors
Pressure Sensor
Latch Sensor
MechanismAssembly
Stepper Motor
Sensors
Rotation Flag
AIL Sensors
Pressure Sensor
Latch Sensor
Power Supply
Vmotor (25V)
Vcc (5V)
Vram (5V)
VAO (5V Batt Proc)
Vneg (-15V)
Vpos (+6V)
Backup
Audio
Buzzer
Backup
Power
Source
Battery Charger
4 Hour Charge Rate
NiCad/NIMH
Capable
Battery
Microprocessor
Watchdog
Battery Charge Control
Battery Monitor
Battery Gauge Interface
Power On/Off Control
Off Line Switching
Power Supply
Integral Fuses
100-240VAC 50/60Hz
Custom Module
AC Input
IEC Power Tub
Line Filter
Main
Speaker
Tamper
Switch
ECD Intf
Optional
Connectors
RS232 ESD Board
RS232 Connector
Speaker Connector
ESD Protection
Optional Nursecall/ECD Ckt
RS232 PCB
Channel B
Serial I/O
MAIN
PCB
Channel A Channel B
4-6
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface (Continued)
7131/7231 Models
The isolated RS-232 interface provides
500VAC electrical isolation between the
RS-232 signals on the RS-232 connector
and the rest of the instrument. The isolation
is created using optical isolators for the
signals and an isolation power transformer
for isolated circuit power. Voltage level
conversions are generated by the
MAX25O/25 1 chip set, to generate the
appropriate signal conditioning. The limit
resistor converts the RS-232 signal levels,
nominally 6V, to match the input signal
range required by the chip set.
Figure 4-3. Electrical Partitioning
Signature Edition

4-7
4.4.6 RS-232 Interface (Continued)
NOTE: The RS-232 board in Models
7131/7231 does not have the Nurse Call
option.
4.5 POWER SYSTEM
4.5.1 Battery Manager
Refer to Battery Management System in
General Information chapter.
The Battery Manager is a custom
programmed microcontroller with 4K of
ROM and 1K of RAM memory. The Battery
Manager has two system time bases, a
32 kHz crystal and a 4 MHz ceramic
resonator. In normal operation, the Battery
Manager operates at 4 MHz. Under low
power condition (instrument is off and AC is
unplugged) the Battery Manager switches to
the lower frequency to save power. The
battery manager is turned on for three
seconds every minute when the instrument
is off and connected to AC power.
The Battery Manager has the following
functions:
Instrument on/off
Battery charge control
Battery gauge
Battery warning and alarm
Real time clock
Displays configuration name
Instrument icon display
Inter-processor communications
Processor self test
Error detection (battery, temperature
input, current integrator, power on/off,
and watchdog faults)
In-circuit test
Figure 4-4. Battery Manager Block Diagram
Signature Edition

AC Supply
Charger
On/Off
Control
DC-DC
Converter
Lower
LCD Display
Watchdog
Main CPU
Battery
Manager
Voltage
Current
Temperature
Analog
Circuits
On/Off
Switch
AC Power
Sensor
4.5 POWER SYSTEM (Continued)
4.5.2 AC Off-Line Switcher
Refer to Figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
4-6 "Main Power Supply".
The AC off-line switcher is an AC to DC
power converter capable of running the
instrument and supplying 22-24V @ 1.5A to
the battery charging circuit from an input of
100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz. The module has
foldback current limiting to protect against
output shorts. It contains two input fuses
which are designed for worst case hospital
line transients and they will only blow if
there is a fault in the module. There are no
user adjustments in the module.
4.5.3 Battery Charge Regulator
Refer to Figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
The battery charger circuit is a step-down
(buck type) switching regulator, U20 (U28),
configured to provide a constant current of
1A through the battery whenever the charge
control signal, CHARGE*, is low. The input
to the battery charger regulator is
DC_INPUT, which is generated by the
off-line switcher between 22-24V.
The circuit measures the battery charge
current through a 0.1 ohm resistor, R29
(R43), between the battery and "P" ground.
This voltage is amplified and sent to the
feedback input of the switching regulator
U20 (U28). The regulator will keep the
voltage at the feedback pin at 1.23V by
adjusting its output pulse width. The gain of
the amplifier is set so that an average
current of 1A through the 0.1 ohm sense
resistor will result in the 1.23V feedback
voltage.
The Battery Manager controls the average
current into the battery by varying the duty
cycle of the charge control. There are four
possible phases for the average current
charge cycle.
Fast Charge: This phase charges at
1 amp within limits on the ambient
temperature. The Battery Manager
charges with this phase until one of the
following charge criteria are met.
Battery voltage drops at least 192mV
below the peak value.
Battery temperature is more than 7C
above starting temperature and at
least 30C.
Total charge time exceeds 3.2 hours.
Top-Up Charge: This phase starts after
fast charge if the battery temperature is
less than 37C, at an average of 180mA
for 180 minutes. This average current is
produced by charging at 1 Ampere for
0.9 seconds every 5 seconds.
NOTE: The charger will turn off if the
battery gets too hot (>37 C) to let the
battery cool down. Cool down time is
NOT included in the 180-minute charge
time.
Float Charge: This phase charges at an
average current of 40mA in a fully
charged battery. This average current is
produced by charging at 1A for 0.2
second every 5 seconds.
Hot Charge: This phase charges at a
rate of 180mA for a total time of 18 hours
if battery temperature is more than 36C.
Charge stops above 43C and starts
below 43C. The cool down time is in
addition to the 18-hour charge time.
4-8
Signature Edition

4.5.4 Refresh Cycle Load
Refer to figures 4-5 "Battery Monitor" and
The battery refresh feature uses the refresh
cycle load circuit to add an additional
resistive load across the battery. This
accelerates the discharge when the
instrument is plugged into AC and is either
on or off.
The signal DUMP_RES, generated by the
Battery Manager, is used to turn on the
transistor, Q9 (Q34), to apply the 47 ohm,
7 Watt, R273 (R353) load to the battery.
4.5.5 VAO Shutdown
VAO_SOURCE is used to supply power to
the Battery Manager, its supporting circuitry
and the RAMs. When the instrument is
turned off, these supplies remain active. If
AC is unplugged, and the battery has
decreased to approximately 9.75V, the
Battery Manager has the ability to remove
these supplies from the battery load. This
circuit is designed to protect the battery by
preventing the battery from getting fully
discharged. The Battery Manager
generates the signal SHUT_DOWN* to
remove the VAO_SOURCE from the battery
load. When the SHUT_DOWN* command
has been given the Battery Manager will
lose power, as well as the RAMs and Lower
LCD display. This power will only be
restored when AC power is connected.
NOTES:
The instrument's operation, after the
battery is disconnected, is the same as
the Battery Manager generating a
SHUT_DOWN* signal and requires the
instrument to be plugged into AC after the
battery has been reconnected.
After reconnecting the battery and
connecting the instrument to AC, wait 15
minutes before powering up.
When the SHUT_DOWN* signal is asserted
low, Q37 (Q39) will turn off, which opens the
path from the battery to VAO_SOURCE.
4.5.6 AC Line Sense
The AC power sense circuit detects the
presence of AC power and notifies the user
and the Battery Manager of its status. The
DC_INPUT is the output of the AC off-line
switcher and should be between 22 to 24V.
When the input voltage, DC_INPUT,
reaches at least 15V, the circuit will
recognize that AC has been plugged in.
When AC power is detected, the AC LED on
the LED module is lit and a status input to
the Battery Manager, AC_PWR, is asserted
high. The circuit is designed to switch off
the LED quickly when AC power is removed.
When DC_INPUT is at least 15V, the
voltage through the sense circuit is high
enough to turn on the AC LED within the
LED module. The AC_LED signal will be
about 1.5 to 2.4V when the LED is on.
4.5.7 System Power Source Select
4-9
Signature Edition

4.5.7 System Power Source Select (Continued)
The system power source,
DC_DC_SOURCE, is used to drive three
switching power supplies. It is controlled by
the Battery Manager through the signal
PWR_ON. When the instrument is on, the
DC_DC_SOURCE is normally supplied by
either the battery or the AC off-line switcher
if the instrument is plugged into AC. The
Battery Manager disconnects the AC source
during the battery refresh cycle.
When the Battery Manager asserts
PWR_ON high, Q24 (Q41) will turn on. If
PWR_AC is high, Q7 (Q25) will turn on, and
DC_DC_SOURCE will be supplied by the
DC_INPUT.
If PWR_AC is high, Q8 (Q21) is on and
DC_DC_SOURCE will be supplied by the
battery.
4.5.8 Battery Voltage Monitor
The battery voltage can range from 10 to
18V. The Battery Manager monitors the
battery voltage through its internal A/D
converter. The valid input range of the A/D
converter is 0 to 4.1V. The battery voltage
must be reduced to meet the input
requirements. The 4.1V reference and the
voltage subtracter-multiplier amplifier circuit
U29-5 (U37-5) scale the battery voltage and
maintain an accuracy of 15 counts
(1 count = lmV).
The Battery Manager uses the battery
voltage for its charging, battery gauge, error
detection, and battery alarm and warning
features.
When MEASURE is low, Q27 (Q43) will
open and remove BATT_PLUS from input to
U29 (U37). Also MEASURE, being low, will
open Q26 (Q45) so that VMEAS is removed
as well.
4.5.9 VMEAS
VMEAS is the supply used to power the
REF 4.1V reference circuit, the voltage
monitor circuit, and the current monitor
circuit. The Battery Manager turns VMEAS
off by setting the MEASURE signal low
when the instrument is off and AC is
unplugged to reduce the load on the battery.
In this condition, the Battery Manager turns
VMEAS on once a minute to check the
battery's voltage and temperature.
The 12V Zener CR31 (CR41) is placed
between the gate and source of the FET,
Q26 (Q45), to limit the gate to source
voltage. The FET can see up to 24V but the
Vgs (Voltage gate to source) of the FET is
only rated to 20V.
4.5.10 Voltage Reference 4.1V
The 4.1V reference is used in the voltage
monitor circuit, the battery temperature
sensor circuit, the ambient temperature
sensor circuit, and is the reference voltage
for the A/D converter in the Battery
Manager. The reference voltage is
4.096V 2%. VMEAS, which can be
between 7.7 to 24V, turns on the precision
reference Zener U27 (U47).
4-10
Signature Edition

4.5.11 System Current Monitor
The circuit to measure the supply current
uses a 0.1 ohm resistor, R32 (R86), to
generate a voltage drop. The resistor is
placed between "P" ground, the ground from
the AC off-line switcher, and "L" ground, the
ground to the rest of the instrument (battery
charger circuit is tied to "P" ground so that
battery charge current is not measured as
system load current). The amplifier, U29-7
(U37-7), is designed as an integrator.
Because the "P" ground voltage will be less
than the "L" ground voltage, a current will be
generated in a resistor tied to the
operational amp's negative input, to
maintain equal voltage levels at the
operational amp inputs. This current
charges the feedback capacitor, C52 (C56),
thereby integrating the current as long as
the feedback transistor, Q30 (Q48), is off.
The Battery Manager integrates the current
for 100 ms, 1 ms before resetting the
integrator by pulsing the signal RESET_I
high for 1 ms. Forcing RESET_I high will
turn on Q30 (Q48) thereby placing a short
across the feedback capacitor, C52 (C56).
The resulting output voltage, I_MON, is fed
to an A/D input of the Battery Manager. At a
1 A load current the output voltage is about
2.7V. The Battery Manager samples I_MON
once before the RESET_I signal is pulsed
high and once after. The difference
between the two samples becomes the
current measurement. The Battery Manager
uses the current measured for the following:
charging
to monitor current in and out of battery
battery gauge
gauge updates under present power
requirements
error detection functions
4.5.12 Always On Supply (+5VAO)
The always on supply, U39 (U43), is used to
power devices that remain powered when
the instrument is off, for example, Battery
Manager circuitry and VRAM. The supply is
regulated at 5V 5%.
4.5.13 System Switching Supplies
The system switching supplies provide
regulated +5V, +29V, and -15V power to the
logic, display, motor, and sensor circuits.
Each of the supplies uses an integrated
switching regulator IC which provides
thermal overload protection, internal
oscillator, internal reference, and current
limit functionality. The DC_DC_SOURCE
voltage is applied to three switching power
supplies:
+5V supply U17 (U31): A step-down
("buck") configuration switching regulator
which provides a lower output voltage
(5V 5%) than input voltage (10V-24V).
The supply can provide in excess of 1A
peak. Output clamp Zener diodes limit
circuit damage in the event of regulator
failure.
4-11
Signature Edition

4-12
(Continued)
The regulator has an internal pass
element which turns on current to the
output inductor until the output voltage,
as sensed through the sense resistors,
reaches the internal 1.23V reference
voltage. It then turns off and the inductive
flyback voltage created is clamped by a
catch diode.
VMOTOR supply U21 (U26): A step-up
("boost") supply which provides a higher
output voltage (29V 1.5V) than the input
supply (9V-24V). The supply can provide
up to 1A peak and has a soft start feature
to limit inrush current upon starting. The
internal pass element shorts the output
side of the power inductor to ground,
then releases it, generating about 29V at
the cathode of a diode. This voltage is
sensed by a resistor pair and the loop
controlled to generate a 1.23V reference
signal level.
VNEG supply U16 (U30): A buck-boost
supply which generates a negative
supply (-15V 1V) from a positive supply
(9V-24V). The supply can provide about
100mA. The IC ground pin is
bootstrapped to the negative output
voltage. Then, referencing the feedback
signal to ground potential allows the chip
to sense the negative voltage and
therefore regulate it.
Figure 4-5. Battery Monitor
Signature Edition

DC_INPUT (22-24V)
SHUT_DOWN*
Battery
Charger
U20 (U26)
BATTERY_PLUS (10-18V)
12V
1.8AH
BATT_TEMP
R273
(R353)
47 OHM
7W
Q37 (Q39)
VAO_SOURCE
Q26 (Q45)
MEASURE
CR31 (CR41)
VMEAS (9-24V)
VREF
4.1V
AMB TEMP
T TH1 (TH1)
L
Battery
Voltage
Monitor
6
V_MON
-
+
U29 (U37)
RESET_I
VREF
4.1V
U27 (U47)
Q27 (Q43)
L
L
L
DUMP_RES
(Part of
Battery
Assembly)
T
CHARGE
Battery
Current
Sense
System
Current
Sense
R29 (R43)
0.1 OHM
R32 (R86)
0.1 OHM
-
+
Q30 (Q48)
I_MON
7
Battery
Current
Monitor
U29 (U37) L P
Ground difference
between switcher
and logic gives
current.
C52 (C56)
4-13
(Continued)
In operation, the internal pass element
provides current through the inductor
while on. When the pass element turns
off, the flyback action of the inductor
generates a negative voltage spike which
is captured across a capacitor though a
steering diode.
4.5.14 VRAM Supply
The VRAM supply is a 4.8V supply
generated for the RAMs to keep them active
when the instrument is turned off. When the
instrument is off, VRAM is sourced by
+5VAO through a diode. When the
instrument is on, VRAM is sourced by +5V
through a diode.
4.5.15 VPOS Supply
A linear regulator, U2 (U1), from a DC-DC
Source provides a 7.5V supply for the
pressure transducer and A/D circuits. The
power is supplied by the DC_DC_
SOURCE.
4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor
The battery temperature sense circuit
measures the temperature in the battery
pack through a nominal 10 kilohm @ 25C
thermistor. The sensor will measure, with a
2.5C accuracy, over the temperature range
0 to 65C. The circuit is a voltage divider
between a resistor and the thermistor with a
4.1V reference voltage used as the input
voltage. The output BATI_TEMP drives an
A/D input to the Battery Manager.
Figure 4-6. Main Power Supply
Signature Edition

AC Line
sense
Q15 (Q47)
AC_LED
L
PWR_AC
PWR_ON
Voltage
Reg
U21 (U26)
DC_INPUT (22-24V)
DC_DC_SOURCE
(9-24V)
AOD_BKLT
L
VNEG
(-15V)
VMOTOR
(29V)
AC_PWR
VPOS
(6V)
DC_DC_SOURCE
ADVREF_RAW
U2 (U1)
VBKUP
(5V)
+5VAO
(5V)
+6V
VREF
4.1V
U41 (U2)
VRAM
(4.8V)
Voltage
Reg
U16 (U30)
VMEAS
Q24 (Q41)
Q7 (Q20)
MEASURE
Q8 (Q21)
BATT_PLUS
(10-18V)
DC_INPUT (22-24V)
AC
Offline
Switcher
Battery
Charger
U20 (U28)
85-264VAC
50/60 Hz
Input
12V
1.8AH
L
Q37 (Q39)
Q26 (Q45)
VAO_SOURCE 7.6-24V
Voltage
Reg
U17 (U31)
Voltage
Reg
U39 (U43)
Voltage
Reg
U31 (U44)
+
L
1F
5.5V
VBKUP_SRC_TST* VBKUP_SRC_EN*
SHUT_DOWN*
4-14
4.5.16 Battery Temperature Sensor
(Continued)
The Battery Manager uses the battery
temperature in its error detection and
charging functions.
4.5.17 System Watchdog
Refer to figure 4-7 "System Watchdog".
The system watchdog provides a monitor on
the operation of the Main Processor and the
Battery Manager. It also provides an
independent clock signal to the Main
Processor for continuous comparison with
the main time base. The Battery Manager
controls an output signal (10 Hz) that
performs multiple functions.
The 10 Hz* has three states:
Continuous High: Instrument is off or
watchdog error has been caused by the
Main Processor.
Continuous Low: Battery Manager
detects an error within the Battery
Manager itself.
Oscillating at 10 Hz.: Instrument is on
or no watchdog errors have occurred.
When the 10 Hz signal begins to oscillate
the watchdog outputs, WD_OUT and
WD_OUT* will be deactivated. The one
shot, U36-9 (U46-13), keeps its output Q
high as long as the falling edges of the
signal (10 Hz*) are faster than the pulse
width of the pulse generated by R245
(R323) and C49 (C67), which is 105 to
220 ms. The Q* output of the one shot,
U36-12 (U46-4), disables the second one
shot U36-13 (U46-5). The second one shot
is only enabled when the watchdog is in
alarm.
Figure 4-7. System Watchdog
Signature Edition

L
L
4 MHz Resonator
32.768 KHz
10 Hz
Battery
Manager
U34 (U40)
10 Hz*
RESET*
U36 (U46)
Q
13 (5)
10 Hz To Main Processor
D Q
PWR_ON
R
Q*
U40 (U39)
Q*
CLK
CL*
PWR_SW_VAO* (A/B*)
+5V
R245 (R323)
C49 (C67)
U36 (U46)
5 (13)
9 (1)
Q
CLK
Q*
12 (4)
Q35 (Q49)
WD_OUT*
NCALL_WD*
WD_OUT
4-15
4.5.17 System Watchdog (Continued)
When 10 Hz* is not oscillating, the one shot,
U36-5 (U46-13), will not trigger, therefore,
output Q is low and Q* is high. The
watchdog outputs, WD_OUT* and
WD_OUT, are activated until the Battery
Manager releases them, by generating the
10 Hz* output. The NCALL_WD* signal is
also brought low because WD_OUT turns
on Q35 (Q49). Whenever the 10 Hz* stops
oscillating and is high, a watchdog error has
occurred within the Battery Manager itself.
The 10 Hz* signal being high, prevents
clock pulses to U36-9 (U46-1) and the one
shot to time-out so the output Q (WD_OUT*)
goes to zero and Q* (WD_OUT) goes to a
high. Once WD_OUT is high, the second
one shot, U36-13 (U46-5), is enabled.
If the user presses either on/off switch,
U29-10 (U42-10) output will go high,
sending a 4 to 11 ms pulse to the Battery
Manager reset input. This allows the user to
reset the Battery Manager through hardware
when the Battery Manager is stuck in a
watchdog error. The system power is also
turned off at this time because the pulse
resets the power latch,U40-9 (U39-9),
bringing PWR_ON low.
The 10 Hz* signal also goes to an interrupt
input of the Main Processor. It is used to
compare the time base of the Main
Processor with the time base of the Battery
Manager. Nominally, the timebase is
100 ms 1 ms from falling edge to falling
edge.
4.5.18 Power Switch (refer to Figure 4-8)
The power on/off switch(es) are located on
the keypad. The switch(es) are not included
in the standard keypad matrix. One (Two)
output(s) is generated, PWR_SW*
(PWR_SW_A/B*), one for each channel.
Figure 4-8. System Reset/Power On
Signature Edition

On/Off
Switch(s)
Keypad
PWR_SW* (A/B*)
100
1 uF
L
VBKUP
100K
100K
PWR_SW_VAO* (A/B*)
Battery Manager
U34 (U40)
R61
INT1*
(INT2*)
R62
U40 (U39)
RST_CPU*
PWR-ON
9
Q
Q*
CLK
R
Power Latch
U36 (U46)
13 (5)
Q
CLK
R
WD Alarm Enables U36-13 (U46-5)
U40 (U39) reset by 8 Msec pulse from U36-13
(U46-5) when power switch pressed to remove
power from instrument.
WD_OUT*
INV
4.5.18 Power Switch (Continued)
The signals are pulled up to 5V, by VBKUP
supply, through two pull-up resistors.
(VBKUP is the supply for the backup audio.)
These signals are decoupled from the
signals that drive the Battery Manager logic,
PWR_SW* (PWR_SW_A/B*), through two
100K resistors. The PWR_SW*
(PWR_SW_A/B*) signals drive interrupt
inputs in the Battery Manager, U34 (U40),
and are used by the error reset and power
on circuits. Upon recognition of the power
switch, the Battery Manager controls when
the Main Processor and the rest of the
circuit will receive power.
4.5.19 System Reset/Power On
System Reset is controlled by the Battery
Manager. Either the lack of a reset inactive
signal from the Battery Manager, U34 (U40),
signal R61 or the lack of the PWR_ON
signal being asserted will initiate a
RST_CPU*.
Power on is also controlled by the Battery
Manager. Under normal conditions the
Battery Manager uses its output R62 to
toggle the power latch, U40-9 (U39-9), to
turn the instrument on/off. The Battery
Manager turns PWR_ON high when the
instrument is on and turns PWR_ON low
when the instrument is off.
If the instrument is on and a watchdog error
is active, WD_OUT* is asserted low. The
second one shot, U36-13 (U46-5), will be
enabled. When the power switch is pressed,
an 8 ms pulse is generated at the Q output
of U36-13 (U46-5). The pulse resets the
power latch, U40-9 (U39-9).
4.5.20 Lower LCD Display Backlight Drive
The backlight for the Lower LCD display
contains 6 LEDs in series. The signal
AOD_BKLT is tied to the anode of the first
LED in the series. Each led has about a 2V
forward drop. So AOD_BKLT will be about
12-13V when the LEDs are turned on.
The Lower LCD display backlight drive
circuit controls the amount of current
supplied to the LEDs. The circuit contains
two current sources "or'd" together. One
current source is powered from DC_INPUT,
the voltage supply from the AC off-line
switcher. The second source is powered
from VMOTOR which is generated when the
instrument is on.
The circuit has four modes of operation:
The instrument is off and unplugged. In
this mode, the backlight driver is off and
the two power supplies that drive the
circuit are both off.
The instrument is off but plugged into AC.
In this mode, the current to the LEDs is
limited by a resistor. VMOTOR will not
be on, so only the DC_INPUT path
generates the current for the LEDs and
the current to the LEDs will be about
4 mA.
The instrument is on and plugged into
AC. In this mode, both current sources
are on, driving the LEDs for maximum
brightness, and the current to the LEDs
should be around 6 mA.
The instrument is on and not plugged
into AC. In this mode, only VMOTOR is
on, so the driver generates the current to
turn on the LEDs and the current to the
LEDs should be around 2 mA.
4-16
Signature Edition

4-17
4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS
4.6.1 Motor Drive (refer to Figure 4-9)
The stepper motor drive circuit consists of a
dual H bridge to provide voltage to each
winding of the hybrid stepper motor, and a
voltage comparator to control the duration
that voltage is applied to each motor
winding.
The sequence of operation for a single
phase [Phase 1 (A)] of the motor is as
follows:
1. Phase A, MTR_PH_1 (MTRA_PH_1) is
active, which causes the high side switch
and low side switch (diagonally opposite
the high side switch), to close. This
presents the motor supply voltage across
the motor winding. The MTR_1A
(MTRA_IA) and MTR_1B (MTRA_1B)
signals are used to drive the motor.
2. Current will begin to increase at a rate
determined by the ratio of the motor
voltage to the inductance of the motor;
for example, about 0.5 amps/millisecond,
and flow in the direction indicated by the
arrow shown. The current will increase in
the sense resistor at the same rate and
result in a voltage sensed by the
comparator.
3. Once the sense resistor voltage MTR_I1
(MTR A/B_I_1) rises above the reference
voltage at the comparator inputs, U14
(U27), the comparator output, U14-1
(U27-7), will switch low forcing the high
side switch to open. The low side switch
will always remain closed until a phase
change occurs. With the supply voltage
now removed from the coil, the coil
current and the sense resistor current will
decay. Once the sense resistor voltage
drops below the reference voltage, the
comparator will turn the high side switch
back on.
The comparator circuit has been
designed with a fixed turn on delay of 50
microseconds. This is a result of the RC
network on the output of the sense
comparator stage. A second comparator
stage will sense when the output of the
first stage rises above 3.3 volts. The turn
on delay results in a maximum chopping
frequency of 20 kHz. The lowest
chopping frequency is a function of the
motor current, at a maximum motor
current of 240 milliampere, the chopping
frequency is 14 kHz. Inserted between
the sense resistor and the comparator
input is an RC network needed for
filtering of the short circuit current caused
by the distributed capacitance of the
motor winding.
4. The chopping action results in a steady
state current in the winding for a given
phase duration. When the phase is
reversed the opposite high side and low
side switch will turn on. This forces
current to flow in the opposite direction.
The reference, MTR_l1 (MTRA_I_1), is
controlled to ramp the motor current
exponentially, minimizing step oscillation
and reducing mechanical noise.
Signature Edition

4-18
4.6 MOTOR DRIVE/SENSORS (Continued)
4.6.1 Motor Drive (Continued)
The following table illustrates the phase
sequence and the respective power, high
side and low side switches that are
enabled.
Table 4-1. Motor Control Signals
To assist the down stream pressure
algorithm and reduce mechanical noise,
the motor is stepped in packets, a series
of motor steps followed by a short resting
period.
5. The efficiency of the motor driver is
determined by the low on resistance in
the MOSFET switches, and the speed at
which they are switched on and off.
Since only the high side switches are
involved in regulating the motor current, a
bipolar network has been designed
around these switches to keep switching
times below a microsecond. An example
of a switching sequence is described as
follows:
To activate the following circuit requires
MTR_PH_1 (MTRA_PH_1), MTR_EN_1
(MTRA_EN_1), and WD_OUT* to be at a
logic high. When the second comparator
output U14-7 (U27-1) switches low, this
turns on transistor Q18 (Q23), which
turns off Q4 (Q17) immediately, thereby
removing the motor voltage from the
motor winding. When U14-7 (U27-1)
switches high, this causes the output of
comparator U13-7 (U25-1) to switch low
and transistor Q18 (Q23) to turn off. This
quickly turns on Q4 (Q17). A 1000 pF
capacitor is in series with the output of
U13-7 (U25-1) to speed up the switching
time of Q4 (Q17) when the comparator
output goes low. Two motor current
sense comparators are included in the
motor drive circuit to provide a means for
the instrument to detect an instrument
malfunction that results in a watchdog
alarm that will shut off current to the
motor. The WD_OUT* signal, when at a
logic low, is the indicator for a "watchdog"
alarm. When motor current of
approximately 20 milliampere or greater
flows through either motor winding the
motor current sense comparator output
MTR_SNS*, U12-7/U12-1
(U17- 1/U17-7), will be at a logic low.
Both motor windings would have to have
a motor current of less than 100
milliampere for the motor current sense
comparator output to go to a logic high.
Control Signal
Logic
Logic
State
Active
Switches
Winding
Effected
MTR_EN_1
MTR_PH_1
H
L
Q4-6, Q3-1
(Q17-6), (Q19-3) MTR_1A/B
MTR_EN_2
MTR_PH_2
H
L
Q6-6, Q5-3
(Q8-6), (Q10-3) MTR_2A/B
MTR_EN_1
MTR_PH_1
H
H
Q4-7, Q3-3
(Q17-7), (Q19-1) MTR_1A/B
MTR_EN_2
MTR_PH_2
H
H
Q6-5, Q5-1
(Q8-7), (Q10-1) MTR_2A/B
Signature Edition

4-19
Figure 4-10. Motor and Mechanism Sensors Block Diagram
COMBO IC
PWM Output
MOTOR_CURRENT_1_A/B
COMBO IC
Digital Output
Constant
Current
Motor
Driver
Motor
Current
Sense
Mechanism
Rotation
Sensor
Mechanism
Latch
Sensor
Stepper
Motor
Coil 1
Stepper
Motor
Coil 2
COMBO IC
Digital Output
MOTOR_CURRENT_2_A/B
MOTOR_PHASE_1_A/B
MOTOR_EN_1_A/B
MOTOR_FLAG_EN
LATCH_FLAG_EN
MOTOR_PHASE_1_A/B
MOTOR_EN_1_A/B
MOTOR_COIL_1A_A/B
MOTOR_COIL_2A_A/B
MOTOR_COIL_1B_A/B
MOTOR_COIL_2B_A/B
MOTOR_CURRENT_SENSE A
MOTOR_FLAG_A/B
MOTOR_LATCH_A/B
WD_OUT
Figure 4-9. Motor Drive Circuit, Phase 1(A)
MTR_I1
(MTRA_I_1)
U14 (U27)
+
-
AMP
Q18 (Q23)
PHASE A
V+
Q4 (17)
Motor Coil A
Q17 (Q25)
PHASE A*
MTR_1B
(MTRA_1B)
MTR_1A
(MTRA_1A)
Q16 (Q24)
PHASE A
Q3 (19)
MTR_SNS*
U12 (U17)
Sense Comparators
Sense Resistor
G
Q19 (Q26)
MTR_PH_1
(MTRA_PH_1)
VIA U13-7 (U25-1)
PHASE A*
Signature Edition

4-20
4.6.2 Air-in-Line Sensor (refer to Figure 4-11)
The Air-in-Line (AlL) Detector System
consists of:
Transmitter arm that also loads set in
position to monitor for air.
Receiver which is mounted in
mechanism.
Voltage control oscillator (VCO).
COMBO IC and associated circuits.
The voltage control oscillator will sweep a
frequency range of 1 to 4 MHz and serve as
the excitation for the ultrasonic AIL
transducer. This frequency sweep is
necessary to ensure that the piezoceramic
elements will achieve resonance over
assembly and temperature variances. The
AIL Gate signal will initiate the VCO to
sweep. The detector is scanned at a
10 msec rate (40 msec to check bubble)
and once a second to test the AIL hardware.
On the receiver side, the signal envelop will
be seen if fluid is in the set. This signal is
then returned to the COMBO IC and
eventually to the processor to determine if
air is present (no signal) and to compute the
size of the air bubble. With accumulator on,
the instrument will consider air bubbles
separated by less than 70 microliters of fluid
as one bubble and alarm accordingly. The
instrument will also alarm if 10% to 15% of
downstream tubing is filled with air (varies
with alarm set point).
4.6.3 Transducer (refer to Figure 4-12)
The transducer assembly is a silicon based
resistor bridge producing a linear output.
The sensing area is in the front of the
assembly and directly in contact with the
tubing (no gel). It is used to measure
stress, not absolute pressure. A film over
the transducer provides a means to protect
the sensor from electrostatic discharge.
The transducer is used to sense upstream
and downstream occlusions as well as
sensing if the set is installed or removed. To
accomplish these tasks the transducer is
calibrated with a special set. The pressure
Figure 4-11. Air-in-Line Detector Block Diagram
COMBO IC
Digital Output
1-4 MHz
Swept Voltage
Controlled
Oscillator
Ultrasonic
Sensor
Signal
Receiver
and Latch
COMBO IC
Digital Input
AIL_GATE
AIL_TEST
AIL_DRVP_A/B
AIL_DRVN_A/B
AIL_RCV_A/B
AIL_SIG_A/B
Figure 4-12. Pressure Sensor Interface Block Diagram
COMBO IC
Digital Output
Pressure
Transducer
Assembly
12-Bit A/D
Converter
PRES_TST_A/B PRES_A/B PRES_SIG_A/B
Inverting
Buffer
Signature Edition

4-21
4.6.3 Transducer (Continued)
calibration set has a hole drilled into the
dome of the AccuSlide
Flow Regulator. This

enables the pressure to be applied directly
to the transducer for calibration (0 and 500
mmHg).
After pressure calibration, the reading
shown in the diagnostic mode for the sensor
is corrected for any offset /stress from
loading the set outside of the pressure
sensing area.
When the set is installed, with dome intact,
the instrument looks for an increase in
stress (greater than 55 mmHg with auto
zero enabled, >90 mmHg with auto zero
disabled). Drift is checked periodically to
ensure the transducer is accurate. If not, a
"Cal Reqd" message will appear. This is
done by asking the operator to remove the
set before powering down the instrument.
The time period of this test is selectable in
the diagnostic mode under the Self Check
timer.
PRES_TST_A/B is used to take the
transducer out of balance by inducing a
known positive offset. This is the means by
which the transducer is tested.
The "Cal Reqd" message will appear if the
transducer shifts more than 170 counts
positive or 200 counts negative from last "0"
cal level.
4.7 USER INTERFACE (refer to Figure 4-13)
The user input interface consists of a
keyboard organized as a 4x8 matrix which is
scanned and controlled through the LED
Module on a single channel instrument and
the Channel A LED Module on the dual
channel instrument. The keyboard is
scanned approximately every 10 ms and
key data updated when there is a change
due to any key or keys being pressed or
released. Note that the panel lock is
scanned as part of the scan sequence even
though it is located on the back of the
instrument. Switches are scanned every
10 msec, two cycles are required to be a
true switch actuation. This provides a
debounce function to eliminate mechanical
noise and EMI/RFI interference. The power
switch(es) are sensed separately by the
Battery Manager. During normal operation,
the power switch(es) are monitored like the
other keys so that inadvertent instrument
turnoff can be avoided. In a system alarm
state (for example, watchdog alarm active),
the keys directly control turning power off to
the instrument.
The user output interface consists of three
display modules. The LED Module(s)
provide rate data visible from a distance,
along with operating mode annunciators,
AC/Battery operation notice, and visual
alarm indication. The Graphic LCD Module
provides user information on a 128x64 dot
matrix display with LED backlight. The
Lower LCD display shows the current
battery charge level along with the current
audio level selected, communications
interface status, panel lock status, and
battery refresh status.
Signature Edition

4-22
4.7 USER INTERFACE (Continued)
4.7.1 Main Speaker Driver
The main speaker driver is based on an
LM386 low voltage speaker drive chip, U32
(U29), driven by an exponentially weighted
4-bit control signal (AMP 0 to 3) modulated
at the desired frequency (200 Hz - 4 kHz) by
the COMBO IC U10 (U14). The speaker is
pulsed at 3 to 50 mA with a 50% duty cycle
(max. 100 mA). The driver has a fixed 26dB
gain which provides up to 3VPP AC coupled
into an 8 speaker. The speaker is tested
by monitoring the speaker current with a
0.511 resistor.
The voltage across the resistor is amplified,
rectified, and compared to low and high
threshold values by a window comparator,
U38 (U16). The speaker is tested when an
alarm or error occurs, while the test circuit is
verified at power up. The speaker audio
volume settings are approximately:
Low = min 45 dB
Med = 65 dB
Hi = approx. 70 dB
4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit
A backup audio generation capability is
provided to allow the instrument to generate
an audible alarm in the event that the main
speaker is unable to do so. It is supplied
through VBKUP, a 1.0 Farad "supercap"
C146 (C179) energy storage device
charged by a 5V linear regulator, U32 (U44),
on the VAO SOURCE supply. The buzzer is
a self oscillating audio generator and
speaker module which produces a 3 to
4 kHz tone when energized. A logic circuit,
U30 (U41), powered by VBKUP arms the
circuit using the BKUP_ALARM_ARM signal
Figure 4-13. User Interface Block Diagram
Signature Edition

COMBO IC
LCD
Interface
LCD_C31/2
COMBO IC
PWM
Output
5-Bit PWM to
0-200mA
LED Drive
8-Bit PWM to
-7V to -11V
Converter
Battery
Processor
LED
Module
LED
Backlit
Graphic
LCD
Module
COMBO IC
Digital Input
LCD_EN
LCD_D7-0
BKLT_LED
BCLK
SDO
LCD_CONT
VEE
BATT_IRPT
SDI_LED
WD_OUT
LED_CATH
LCD_WR
LCD_RS
COMBO IC
Serial
Control
Unit
LED_CS_A/B
SCLK
Lower
Display
COMBO IC
Serial
Control
Unit
SEQ23-0
COMM-1
SDI_BATT
KYBD_IRPT
Front
and Rear
Keypads
KEY_COL_4-0
KEY_ROW_7-0
4-23
4.7 USER INTERFACE (Continued)
4.7.2 Backup Audio Buzzer and Test Circuit
(Continued)
once the instrument has powered up so that
the watchdog WD_OUT* signal will not
generate an alarm if the unit is turned on or
off properly. Additional logic is provided to
allow the power switch(es) to turn off the
backup audio if the main CPU or battery
processor no longer have control over the
instrument.
The circuit has two test functions. The
VBKUP supply is tested at power up to
verify that the supercap can drive the buzzer
when the regulator is disabled through
VBKUP_SRC_EN signal. The buzzer
operation is tested by sensing the oscillating
current waveform generated by a normally
operating buzzer. The buzzer current is
sampled by a sense resistor, whose voltage
is amplified. The DC level is compared to
VTHRES Hi by a comparator, U33 (U33),
whose output (BKUP_SPKR_TST*) drives a
digital input on the COMBO IC.
4.8 LED MODULE
The LED Module(s) provide rate data, along
with operating mode annunciators,
AC/Battery operation notice, and visual
alarm indication. The modules have 58
individual LEDs controlled by a custom IC.
The IC performs LED scanning and test
functions along with keyboard scanning
circuits and interfaces to the main CPU
through the local serial interface. The LED
intensity is controlled by the Main Processor
to limit power use while running on battery.
Figure 4-14. Main Speaker
Signature Edition

COMBO
IC
U10 (U14)
AMP 0 to 3
3 to 50 mamp
L
L
L
U32 (U29)
+
-
SUM AMP
SPKR_POS
SPKR_NEG
+
-
Rear Case
Main Speaker
2KHz
MAIN_SPKR_TST
U38 (U16)
Window
Comparator
VTHRES HI
+
-
OP AMP
U37 (U32)
Gain = 37
R58 (R351)
0.511 OHM
VTHRES LOW
+
-
+
-
4.9 LOWER LCD DISPLAY
The Lower LCD Display is visible whether
the instrument is on or off, AC or battery
operation. It shows the current battery
charge available along with the current
audio level selected, communications
interface status, panel lock status, and
battery refresh status. It is driven by the
Battery Manager and is back lit when the
instrument is on or plugged into AC.
4.10 MAIN LCD MODULE
The Main LCD Module provides user
information on a 128x64 dot matrix display
with LED backlight. The Main Processor
generates all text and symbols in bit
mapped form, then compares data read
back from the display memory to that which
was generated to find and avoid problems.
Screen updates occur every 100 mSec.
The backlight intensity is controlled by the
Main Processor to limit power use while
running on battery. The LCD contrast is
controlled by the main CPU and can be
adjusted from factory default through the
diagnostics mode. Refer to "Changing Main
LCD Contrast" section in Troubleshooting
chapter.
4-24
Figure 4-16. Lower LCD Display
Figure 4-15. Backup Audio
VAO_SOURCE
VBKUP_SRC_EN*
5V REG
U31 (U44)
VBKUP
4.9 to 5.1V
+
C146 (C179)
Super Cap
1.0F
5.5V
Super cap takes up to 30 minutes
to charge and lasts from 11 minutes
to 2 hours.
Q12 (Q29)
U30 (U41)
Digital
Logic
PWRSW_VBKUP
BKUP_ALARM_ARM
WD_OUT*
L
100 OHM
U37 (U32)
-
+
OP AMP
GAIN=14
VTHRES HI
U33 (U33)
BKUP_SPKR_TST*
SPKR2
3 to 4 Khz
-
+
-
+
L
Signature Edition

MNTR
GOLD
4.10 MAIN LCD MODULE (Continued)
4.10.1 Main LCD Backlight
The graphic LCD backlight is an array of
LEDs driven by an adjustable constant
current source controlled by a PWM signal
from the COMBO IC. The LED current can
be adjusted stepwise linearly over a
0-200 mA range. The current source
consists of a low on resistance FET, 0.511
sense resistor, and op amp to set the sense
resistor voltage based on the filtered PWM
input voltage BKLT_LED. The backlight
intensity is not user adjustable.
4.10.2 Graphic LCD Contrast
The graphic LCD contrast is controlled by
varying the VNEG supply to the module
over a -7V to -11V range. The drive circuit
inverts and scales the filtered PWM
LCD_CONT signal from the COMBO IC to
cover this range. Nominally, the contrast
voltage is -9V, but can be adjusted through
Diagnostics Mode in software.
4.11 NURSE CALL CIRCUIT
(7130/7230 ONLY)
An optional nurse call circuit is located on
the RS-232/Nurse Call board and provides a
35V @ 1A rated relay contact on system
alarms through pins 6 and 9 of the RS-232
connector.
4.12 PANEL LOCK SWITCH
The instrument can be protected from
unauthorized changes with the Panel Lock
Switch. A lock symbol is shown in the
Lower LCD display whenever the feature is
active. When activated, access to all front
panel keys is restricted (except channel
select and split screen viewing key).
4.13 ECD BOARD (refer to Figure 4-17)
The ECD board (optional for 7130/7230)
provides empty container detection using
standard ALARIS
Model 180 Flow

Sensors.
The flow sensor interface is a separate
board assembly which drives a standard
ALARIS
Model 180 Flow Sensor, performs

ambient light rejection on the resulting
signals, and provides digital output signals
for a detected drop and sensor attached
detection. The board consists of 2 separate
ambient light discriminator loops and drop
detectors for independent Model 180 Flow
Sensors along with common timing and
control logic. The board assembly is
common to both single and dual channel
instruments, where the "B" channel is not
available externally and is ignored in the
software of the single channel instruments.
Note that the "A" channel is used for both
the "A" channel in the dual channel
instrument as well as the single channel
instrument, even though the mechanisms
are on opposite sides of the case.
Common Timing Logic:
The common timing and control logic
generates the necessary discriminator
timing signals to drive the flow sensor
LED and sample signals representing
room ambient light and LED driven light
outputs from the flow sensor. The main
system CLK_32MHz is used as the
timebase and decade counter U3 that
generates non-overlapping "A" and "B"
channel drive and sense signals. This
reduces the peak LED current load and
flow sensor crosstalk during normal
operation. Transistors Q5 and Q6 provide
logically inverted control signals for the
LED drive circuits.
4-25
Signature Edition

4-26
4.13 ECD BOARD (Continued)
Ambient Light Discriminator Loop:
The flow sensor drive current is set to
maintain a 2.8V level normally at
DROP_A/B. This level is determined by
the difference in input signal from a
Model 180 Flow Sensor when the emitter
is undriven and driven. Analog
multiplexor U4 normally grounds the
output of the sense capacitor C18/23 so
that room ambient light signal voltage is
set across it. When the LED drive is
turned on, the output of the sense
capacitor, representing the driven signal
voltage less the ambient signal voltage,
is transferred to sample capacitor
C28/C26. This signal is amplified by
U8/U7 with a gain of about 23 and is the
DROP_A/B signal.
The DROP_A/B signal is sensed by
integrator U1/U6 and C9/C10 to generate
an appropriate LED drive level to
maintain DROP_A/B at about 2.8V. The
integrator output signal is controlled by
drive enable FET Q1/Q2 to drive the LED
constant current sink U1/Q4 and relate
components. The constant current
source generates a 0-200mA sink current
with a 0V-1V input signal.
To prevent a drop from skewing the LED
drive signal, a long time constant filter,
consisting of CR1/CR2, R31/R13, and
C9/C10, is enabled on a negative going
output signal DROP_A/B.
Drop Detector:
The drop detector circuit generates a
digital pulse when a valid drop event is
detected. A drop event occurs when a
fluid drop passes between the emitter
and detector of the Model 180 Flow
Sensor and appears as a generally
negative going short duration pulse on
the DROP_A/B signal. Detector
comparators U8B/U7B generate a 0 to
5V pulse when a drop "signature" of
appropriate length and duration occurs.
One shots U9A/B generate a nominal
20ms pulse which indicates a valid drop
(ECD-SIG-A/ECD-SIG-B). The main
system processor processes the pulse
stream and determines whether the
drops are occurring properly for the
current instrument rate and operating
mode (for example, primary/secondary).
EMC filtering is provided by filters C4-8 to
limit EMI into or out of the flow sensor
connection pins.
Figure 4-17. Flow Sensor Interface Block Diagram
Signature Edition

Integrator
CLK 32K Hz
Drop_A/B 2.8 V
U7B/U8B
ECD_INSTALLED
ECD AACTIVE
U9A/B
ECD_SIG_A/B
U4
U7/
U8
V
V
+5 V
+5 V
U1/U6 U1/Q4
<18/23
<28/26
Sense
Capacitor
Sample
Capacitor Constant
Current
Sink
Drop
Detector
Combo IC
One
Shot
Timing
Logic
A
C
Model 180 Flow Sensor
4.13 ECD BOARD (Continued)
Option Installed and Sensor Installed
Circuit:
The installed option detection consists of
the input signal on pin 7 of J3 tied to +5V
on the board. The Main Processor has a
pulldown resistor on the
ECD_INSTALLED signal which
generates a logic low signal if the option
is not installed. Flow sensor installed
signals are generated by monitoring the
LED current sink drive transistor collector
voltage. Comparator U2A/U2B monitor
the voltage and generate a 5V output
signal if they drop below about 1.7V.
Note that, nominally, the collector voltage
should not go below about 2.2V with a
flow sensor attached and driven at
maximum current.
4-27
Signature Edition

4-28
THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Signature Edition

5
C
O
R
R
E
C
T
I
V
E

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
The instrument case should only be opened by
qualified personnel using proper grounding
techniques. Disconnect instrument from AC
prior to performing maintenance. Hazardous
voltages are present when AC power is
connected, regardless of the ON/OFF Switch
setting.
Chapter 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5-1
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains procedures required
to properly disassemble, repair and replace
parts as well as to test, calibrate, and
reassemble a Signature Edition
GOLD
Infusion System.
A thorough familiarization with the function
and operation of the mechanical assemblies
and electrical circuits of the pump will enable
repair and calibration to be accomplished
more efficiently (refer to Principles of
Operation chapter).
The circuit boards used in the instrument
are fitted with surface mount devices and
are deemed nonfield repairable. Therefore,
ALARIS Medical Systems requires that all
circuit boards be returned to an authorized
ALARIS Medical Systems Service Center
CAUTION
NAME MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER APPLICATION
Electrical Safety Tester BIO-TEK 260*
Used to test AC wiring and pump
grounding.
IV Infusion Set IVAC 80 VCS Rate accuracy test
Nurse Call Cable IVAC 136111 Nurse call option
Pressure Cal Set IVAC 70ISS Pressure verification and calibration
Pressure Gauge
(-400 to +750mmHg)
Dresser Industries:
203-406-3115
(Heise) BIO-TEK:
802-655-4040
PTE1/901M1*
DPM III*
Pressure verification and calibration
Burette 50mL, 0.1mL
increment
Fisher Scientific
Keynex
Class A or B*
113 Sec A*
Rate calibration and verification
RS-232 (9-pin, Null modem) IVAC 133450*
Connects between 2 instruments to
download configuration.
Silicon Tubing IVAC 303109* Pressure calibration setup
T-Fitting IVAC 313815* Pressure calibration setup
NiCad Battery Optomizer
Alexander Batteries
800-577-2539
Model 2006*
2003*
Test and condition batteries (optional)
Hand-Held Vacuum Any Any Main board assembly cleaning
Table 5-1. Test Equipment
WARNING
* or equivalent
CMOS devices are sensitive to static electrical
charges and may be damaged during repair if
the repair activity is not performed in an
electrostatic discharge (ESD) protected
environment, using approved ESD protective
procedures, including personnel grounding, or
the instrument could be damaged.
Signature Edition

5.1 INTRODUCTION (Continued)
for repair. If circuit board repairs are
attempted, all warranties will be void.
ALARIS Medical Systems recommends that
parts within the instrument be replaced
rather than repaired when not working
properly. Boards, mechanism and display
modules must be replaced as an assembly.
The tests to be performed on a just-repaired
instrument depend on the level of repairs
made to the instrument. See Table 5-2,
Level of Testing Guidelines.
NOTE: Due to instrument changes over
time, components/assemblies illustrated in
this chapter may be different than those in
the instrument being disassembled. If there
are any questions, look for Service Bulletins
related to this chapter or contact ALARIS
Medical Systems, Technical Support.
5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
The following procedures are presented in a
sequence that provides the most efficient
means of accessing and removing the
subassemblies. To reassemble, perform the
steps in their reverse order. Refer to the
Routing and Connecting Cables section
before closing. Figure 5-1, Instrument
Assembly Organization, provides the
instruments hierarchy.
Though a dual channel instrument is
depicted in the following procedures, both
instruments disassemble in the same
manner. Channel B will be the same as a
single channel instrument.
Disconnect instrument from AC power
before disassembling.
Disconnecting Cables
Pay close attention to cable routing when
disassembling the instrument. The cables
are specifically routed to ensure they are not
pinched or stressed when reassembled.
Channel A (ChA) and Channel B (ChB)
wires are routed in the opposite direction to
connect to the board assembly.
NOTE: Single channel pump routing is
similar to Channel B (ChB).
Exercise caution when removing
connectors. Pulling on wires can break
them. Wires and connectors must be
replaced as part of an assembly. They
cannot be repaired separately.
Instrument
Front Case
Main Board
Mechanism (including , and Pressure Sensor) AIL LATCH
Main Keypad
Lower LCD
LED
Main LCD
Rear Case
Pole Clamp
Panel Lock Switch
Speaker
Battery
Fan
RS-232 Board
AC Off Line Switcher
AC Line Filter ECD Board (optional)
Figure 5-1. Instrument Assembly Organization
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5-2
WARNING
CAUTION
Signature Edition

(Continued)
5.2.1 Removing Battery (Figures 5-2 and 5-3)
NOTE: Instrument configuration will not be
lost when disconnecting power; however,
error history and infusion program settings
may be lost. To save error history, record
before proceeding.
1. Disconnect AC power from instrument.
2. Remove screw from Power Cord
Retainer, on rear case, using a Phillips
screw driver.
3. Remove Power Cord and Power Cord
Retainer.
When there is no AC power available, DO
NOT replace dead battery for the purpose of
re-powering the instrument. The instrument
will not operate unless it is first connected to
AC power after battery replacement.
4. Lift and remove Battery Cover.
5. Lift cable for battery out of compartment.
6. Pull battery from compartment and
disconnect.
NOTE: The instrument will not run with
battery disconnected.
During Reassembly:
1. Connect and install battery. Note the
rated capacity of the battery.
2. Reassemble battery cover, power cable
and power cord retainer.
3. If battery has been replaced:
a. New battery may have a different rated
capacity (current battery has rated
capacity of 1.8 Ah, with 1.3 Ah entered
in Diagnostics Mode).
if it does, proceed to Diagnostics
Mode (D2), select Battery Status and
enter new rated capacity. Refer to
Changing Rated Capacity of Battery
section in Troubleshooting chapter.
NOTE: In the event ALARIS Medical
Systems provides different battery packs in
the future, the replacement battery may
have a different rated capacity. The battery
manager needs to know if a new battery,
possibly with a new rated capacity, has
been installed.
b. Clear battery run time via Diagnostics
Mode after installing new battery.
Refer to "Viewing Battery and Total
Run Times" section in
NOTE: The instrument will attempt to
refresh the battery when it is first
installed and connected to AC power.
This refresh may take in excess of 24
hours if the instrument is turned on.
5-3
CAUTION
Signature Edition

(Continued)
5.2.1 Removing Batteries (Continued)
Figure 5-2. View From Back of Instrument
5-4
Figure 5-3. Alternate View From Back of Instrument
Signature Edition

Battery Cover Power Cord
Power Cord Retainer
Battery Cover Screw
Battery Cover
Battery
5-5
(Continued)
5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies
(Figures 5-4 through 5-9b)
1. Press on cutouts to pop off cap for
handle from inside (between handle and
case) to access two screws to open
instrument. Remove 2 screws using a
Phillips screw driver (Figure 5-4).
2. Remove hidden case screw inside
battery compartment (Figure 5-5).
3. Remove remaining case screws (6 for
dual, 4 for single) (Figure 5-6).
4. Lay instrument face down.
5. Position pole clamp knob down (Figure
5-6).
6. Lift rear case to access inside of
instrument.
7. Disconnect power supply board
connector/battery cable (Figure 5-7).
8. Lift up locking bar and remove RS-232
flex cable from front case (Figures 5-7
and 5-8).
9. Disconnect ground wires (1 for single
channel) from under motor (Figure 5-7).
10. Inspect and clean main board assembly,
as follows, whenever instrument is
opened and prior to performing
repair/maintenance procedures.
NOTE: Dust may be brought into the
instrument through the cooling fan. If
instruments are consistently used in a
dusty environment, perform cleaning
yearly as part of the preventive
maintenance procedure.
a. Examine main board assembly for
any signs of dust and clean, as
necessary, using a natural bristle
brush or hand-held vacuum.
b. Using a natural bristle brush or hand-
held vacuum, remove dust from the
fan.
NOTE: Seal the vacuum contents in
an appropriate bag and dispose
according to hospital protocol.
c. Perform a visual check of
mechanism springs (Refer to
Mechanism Visual Check section).
During Reassembly:
(Figures 5-9a and 5-9b)
1. Refer to Routing and Connecting
Cables section.
2. Install and tighten case screws as
follows:
a. Install and snug each screw,
beginning with #1 screw, until all
screws are snug and case halves are
flush.
b. Tighten each screw a 1/4 turn more
beginning with #1 screw installed.
c. Close latch when assembly is
complete.
d. If ECD feature is not being used,
install rubber plug in flow sensor
receptacle.
Signature Edition

(Continued)
(Figures 5-4 through 5-9b)
5-6
Figure 5-4. Cap Handle Screws
Figure 5-5. Hidden Case Screw in Battery Compartment
Signature Edition

(Remove Handle Cap to access
Case Screws from back)
Handle Cap
Snap Fit Points
Hidden Case Screw
Battery Compartment
5-7
Figure 5-6. Case Screw and Pole Clamp Position
(Continued)
5.2.2 Separating Case Assemblies (Continued)
Signature Edition

RS 232
Remaining
Case Screws
Pole Clamp Knob
(Knob may appear like this)
5-8
Figure 5-8. Locking Bar
(Continued)
Figure 5-7. Separating Case Assemblies
Channel B Channel A
RS-232 Flex Cable
Locking Bar
Power Supply Board
Connector/Battery Cable
Ground Wire
Ground Wire
Locking Bars are used wherever flex
cables connect to Main PCB (7 places)
Locking Bars must be unlocked for
disassembly and locked for reassembly
Locked position
Unlocked position
Flex cable
PCB
Signature Edition

5-9
(Continued)
Figure 5-9a. Torque Sequence (Single)
Signature Edition

RS 232
7 6
2
5
3
1
4
Case Screws (7)
Torque Sequence
1 Case Screw inside
Battery Compartment
(Continued)
(Continued)
5-10
Figure 5-9b. Torque Sequence (Dual)
RS 232
1
2 3
4
5
6
7 8
9
Signature Edition

Case Screws (9)
Torque Sequence
1 Case Screw
inside Battery
Compartment
5-11
(Continued)
5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board
Assembly (Figures 5-10a and 5-10b)
1. Remove 4 screws from Heat Sink using
Torx 3/32" (or 2.5mm) driver to separate
power supply board from inside of rear
case.
2. Disconnect cable from power supply
board.
NOTE: DO NOT remove cover from back
of power supply board. If it is loose,
reinstall with RTV.
Figure 5-10a. Removing Power Supply Board Assembly
RS 232
Signature Edition

Pole Clamp
3/32 Screws (4)
5-12
Figure 5-10b. Disconnecting Cable
(Continued)
5.2.3 Removing Power Supply Board
Assembly (Continued)
Signature Edition

Power Supply Cable
Power Supply
Board Assembly
Cover
5-13
(Continued)
5.2.4 Removing ECD and RS-232 Board
Assemblies (Figures 5-11 through 5-13)
1. If installed, remove screw on ECD board
using Phillips screw driver, then remove
ECD board.
2. Pull RS-232 cover away from connector
and remove 2 hex nuts using 3/16"
socket wrench .
3. Disconnect Panel Lock Key Pad flex
cable by lifting up on locking bar.
4. Disconnect speaker and fan from RS-232
Board.
5. Remove screw on RS-232 board using
Phillips screw driver, then remove
RS-232 board.
Figure 5-11. Rear Case ECD Board
Signature Edition

ECD Board
5-14
5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Continued)
Assemblies (Continued)
Figure 5-12. RS-232 Cover
Signature Edition

RS-232 Connector
(cover in place)
RS-232 Connector
(cover open)
3/16 inch Hex Nuts
and Lock Washers
5-15
Figure 5-13. RS-232 Board
5.2 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Continued)
Assemblies (Continued)
Signature Edition

RS-232 Board
Fan Connector
Panel Lock Key Pad Flex Cable
Panel Lock Key Pad
Locking Bar
Speaker Connector
Cable
5-16
Figure 5-14. Line Filter Assembly
(Continued)
5.2.5 Removing Line Filter (Figure 5-14)
1. Remove screw from Line Filter using
Phillips screw driver.
2. Remove two screws from exterior power
connector using Phillips screw driver.
3. Cut zip tie.
4. Remove exterior power connector and
Line Filter assembly.
Signature Edition

Line Filter
(Behind RS-232 Board)
Line Filter Screws
(access from back)
5-17
(Continued)
5.2.6 Removing Speaker and Fan
(Figure 5-15)
1. Spread speaker tabs and remove
speaker.
2. Spread fan tabs and remove fan.
Figure 5-15. Speaker and Fan Assembly
Signature Edition

Speaker Tab
Speaker
Fan Tab (2 places)
Fan
Speaker Connector
Fan Connector
(Continued)
5.2.7 Removing Pole Clamp
(Figures 5-16 and 5-17)
1. Remove power supply board assembly.
2. Remove hardware securing pole clamp
to heat sink.
NOTE: If an older version of the pole
clamp was installed using a shoulder
screw and wave washer, use a 3/16 allen
wrench to remove shoulder screw.
Discard shoulder screw and wave washer.
3. Remove tip from end of pole clamp knob
by pressing spiral pin out of opening in
end of brass thread.
4. Unscrew knob from pole clamp.
During Reassembly:
1. Screw knob into pole clamp assembly.
2. Attach pole clamp tip to end of thread on
knob and press spiral roll pin into
opening, through thread and tip.
NOTE: Press pin in so both ends of pin
are below bottom of threads on stud.
3. Reinstall compression spring into spring
release switch.
4. Install spring release switch onto pole
clamp assembly.
NOTE: Ensure compression spring seats
properly in pole clamp channel.
5. Apply lubricant (Dow Corning MolyKote
33 or Novagard Versilube G321) to
portion of pole clamp mounting pin that
protrudes through spring release switch.
6. Insert pole clamp mounting pin through
opening in heat sink.
7. Install wave washer over end of pole
clamp mounting pin.
8. Install flat washer over end of pole clamp
mounting pin, on top of wave washer.
9. Place retaining ring over end of pole
clamp mounting pin, on top of flat
washer. Press downward on retaining
ring, compressing flat washer and wave
washer downward until retaining ring
snaps into groove on mounting pin.
10. Verify retaining ring is correctly installed.
Rotate retaining ring inside groove to
ensure correct installation.
5-18
Signature Edition

5-19
Figure 5-16. Pole Clamp Assembly
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Brass Knob
(old version)
Stainless Steel Knob
(new version)
Spiral Pin
Compression Spring
Shown For
Reference Only
Flat Washer
Retaining
Ring
Wave
Washer
Heat Sink
(reference)
Spring Release Switch
(Pole Clamp Lock)
Apply grease to
mounting pin
Tip
Pole Clamp
5-20
Figure 5-17. Retaining Ring Installation
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Incorrectly Installed
Wide Gap
Top View
Mounting Pin
Exposed Groove
Retaining Ring
Correctly Installed
Narrow Gap
Top View
5-21
(Continued)
5.2.8 Disconnecting Cables
(Figures 5-18a through 5-18c)
Rear Case
1. Disconnect flex cable for RS-232 board
assembly. Lift up on locking bar before
attempting to remove flex cable from
main board assembly.
2. Disconnect power supply cable from
power supply board.
3. Disconnect fan and speaker cable.
4. Disconnect battery/power cable from
main board.
5. Disconnect ground wires from
mechanism assembly. If needed,
unhook ground wires from cable clamps
(4 places on dual channel, 2 places on
single channel).
6. Continue disassembly as required.
Figure 5-18a. Rear Case Cable Routing
Signature Edition

Power Supply Cable
Clamp (Zip Tie)
Tamper Switch
Cable
Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)
Fan
Speaker
RS-232 Flex
Connector
Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)
Power Supply
Cable
Battery/Power Cable
5-22
Figure 5-18b. Front Case Cable Routing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Front Case
1. Cut tie #l for ChB motor and AlL receiver
(black).
2. Cut tie #2 for ChB motor, Latch, Rotation
and AlL receiver (black).
3. Cut tie #4 for ChA motor, Latch, Rotation
and AlL receiver (white).
4. Cut tie #5 for ChA motor and AlL receiver
(white).
5. Disconnect ChA and ChB transducer
wires (blue) from the board.
6. Disconnect ChA and ChB ground wires
(black) going to the mechanism
assembly.
7. Disconnect flex cables for front panel,
LED modules, main LCD, RS-232 board
assembly and lower LCD as needed. Lift
up on locking bar before attempting to
remove flex cable.
8. Continue disassembly as required.
Signature Edition

Channel B Channel A
Back 4-Bar
LED Flex Cable
Latch Cable
Ground Wires
RS-232 Flex Cable
Lower LCD
Flex Cable
Motor Cable
AIL Transmitter Cable
Tie #1
XDCR Cable
AIL Receiver Cable
Rotation Cable
Tie #2
Motor Cable
Power Supply Board
XDCR Cable
5-23
Figure 5-18c. Front Case Cable Routing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Channel B Channel A
Back 4-Bar
Motor Cable
AIL Receiver Cable
Rotation Cable
Tie #4
Latch Cable
XDCR Cable
Tie #5
Motor Cable
(Continued)
5.2.9 Removing Main Board (Figure 5-19)
1. Disconnect all wire connections to main
board. Refer to Disconnecting Cables
section.
NOTES:
When removing flex cables, carefully
lift locking bar to remove cable from
connector.
Pay particular attention to wire routing.
Wires should be routed back to initial
scheme and similar to the example
shown. This will prevent them from
getting pinched and jamming the
mechanism.
2. Remove screw from main board using
Phillips screw driver. Slide main board to
top, then lift and remove.
NOTE: The large capacitor for the backup
speaker may be discharged after removing
the board. Jumper across terminals of
capacitor C-146 (C-179) for one minute.
Refer to Troubleshooting chapter for
more information.
During Reassembly:
After installing the new main board, perform
the following:
1. Check Rate Cal number in Diagnostic
Mode.
D4 screen should have a Rate Cal # of
0% (refer to Preventive Maintenance
chapter for Rate Calibration Procedure,
if needed, and Troubleshooting chapter
for procedure to change).
2. Perform Soft Pressure Calibration after
30 minutes warm-up.
5-24
Signature Edition

5-25
Figure 5-19. Removing Main Board
(Continued)
5.2.9 Removing Main Board (Continued)
Signature Edition

Main Board Screw
(Continued)
5.2.10 Removing LED and LCD Modules
(Figure 5-20)
1. Use fingers to compress and push back
snap fittings holding upper LEDs (only 1
on single channel), then lift and remove.
snap fittings holding main LCD module,
then lift and remove.
snap fittings holding lower LCD module,
then lift and remove.
5-26
Figure 5-20. LED / LCD Modules and Snap Fittings
Signature Edition

Snap Fittings
Snap Fittings
LED Channel A
LED Channel B
Main LCD Module
Lower LCD Module
5-27
(Continued)
5.2.11 Removing Mechanism
1. Move mechanism latch to middle
position. This will allow air-in-line sensor
to clear case when extracted.
2. Disconnect wiring harnesses from main
board. Note their location. They will be
reconnected to same location.
3. Using a flat head screwdriver, unsnap 3
snap fittings (top and both sides) holding
mechanism to front case, then remove
mechanism.
4. Mark mechanism(s) latch housing "A" or
"B" with permanent ink to ensure
reinstallation in proper location on dual
channel pumps.
During Reassembly:
1. Install mechanism.
2. Perform pressure and rate calibration
(Preventive Maintenance chapter).
Figure 5-21. Mechanism Latch in Middle
Position
Figure 5-22. Remove Mechanism
Signature Edition

Snap fittings
Mechanism
Snap fittings
Channel A Channel B
Latch (opened
half way)
3. Slide on AlL gear and align AlL gear tab.
4. Press AlL gear into place.
NOTE: When AIL gear is pressed onto
AIL transmitter, AIL transmitter may shift
slightly as gear locks into place.
5. Use needle-nose pliers to lock gear tab
into place.
6. Turn mechanism latch to far left (closed
position) and check AlL transmitter
alignment. AlL transmitter must be in
closed position (horizontal) (Figure 5-25).
7. If AlL transmitter is not properly aligned:
unlock, realign and relock gear tab until
transmitter is properly aligned.
NOTE: AIL transmitter may need to be
aligned with inner edge of mechanism
seal before locking gear into place.
8. Move mechanism latch to middle
position. Install mechanism into front
case.
9. Route and connect cables. Install cable
tie straps on cables as before.
(Continued)
5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm)
(Figures 5-23 through 5-25)
NOTE: Observe placement of cable ties (for
reinstallation). Cut and remove them from
cables.
1. Use needle-nose pliers to unlock AlL
gear tab (Figure 5-23).
2. If replacing AlL receiver, replace before
continuing with AlL transmitter
removal/replacement.
3. Remove AlL gear and AlL transmitter
from mechanism.
4. Move mechanism latch to right (open
position).
During Reassembly:
1. Slide AlL transmitter through faceplate.
Rotate AlL transmitter to open (vertical)
position (Figure 5-24).
2. Thread AlL transmitter wire through AlL
gear.
Grease is applied to a new AlL
transmitter for lubrication purposes. Do
not remove grease when installing a new
AlL transmitter into the mechanism. Do
not apply additional grease to the AlL
gear.
5-28
CAUTION
Signature Edition

5-29
(Continued)
5.2.12 Removing AIL Transmitter (Arm)
(Continued)
Figure 5-23. Unlocking AIL Gear Tab Figure 5-24. AIL Transmitter in
Open Position
Figure 5-25. AIL Transmitter in
Closed Position
Signature Edition

AIL
Transmitter
Slot
Tab
AIL
Transmitter
Inner Edge of
Mechanism
Seal
AIL
Receiver
(Continued)
5.2.13 Removing AIL Receiver (Button)
NOTE: Observe placement of cable ties (for
reinstallation). Cut and remove existing
straps from cables.
1. Turn mechanism latch to far right. AlL
transmitter will be in open position.
2. Push AlL receiver in and rotate about 90
o
clockwise. AlL receiver should pop out.
3. Remove AlL receiver wire from
faceplate's hook and remove receiver
from mechanism.
NOTE: Leave AIL spring in place for new
AIL receiver.
During Reassembly:
1. Thread AlL receiver wire through
opening.
2. Install AlL receiver with flat edge of
assembly positioned as shown in Figure
5-26.
NOTE: Mechanism seal may be lifted up
to position AIL receiver accurately.
3. Push AlL receiver in and rotate 90
o
counter-clockwise to lock into place.
4 Tuck mechanism seal under AlL receiver.
5. Proceed with AlL transmitter
replacement, if needed, and continue
following steps for AlL receiver
replacement.
6. Close and open mechanism latch several
times to ensure AlL transmitter and
receiver open and close properly.
7. Route AlL receiver's wire under
faceplate's hook (Figure 5-27).
8. With mechanism latch opened halfway,
install mechanism into front case.
9. Route and connect cables. Install cable
tie straps onto cables.
5-30
Figure 5-26. Flat Edge of AIL Receiver Figure 5-27. Faceplate Hook
Signature Edition

Flat
Edge
Mechanism
Seal
Faceplate
Hook
5-31
(Continued)
5.2.14 Removing Seal Clip (Figure 5-28)
1. Put latch in middle position to remove
seal clip.
2. Use an orange stick to push 2 lower tabs
inward while pulling out on seal clip to
unsnap seal clip.
3. Remove seal clip.
During Reassembly:
Align seal clip and snap it in place.
Figure 5-28. Mechanism Latch in Middle
Position
Signature Edition

Latch (opened
half way)
(Continued)
5.2.15 Removing Mechanism Seal
1. Peel off mechanism seal from
mechanism.
2. Peel and clean off any RTV adhesive
remaining around pressure sensor area.
To avoid damage, be careful not to apply
excessive pressure on the pressure
transducer.
During Reassembly: (Figure 5-29)
1. Apply mechanism seal on mechanism.
2. Use an orange stick to tuck seal in
around flow control actuator, clamp arms,
cam follower and AIL receiver.
3. Reinstall seal clip and AIL transmitter.
4. Use RTV 3140 under edges of seal and
secure in place.
5. Remove any excess RTV with a cotton
swab, Kimwipes or equivalent. Verify no
RTV is exposed to open area.
6. Allow RTV to dry and reinstall
mechanism.
5-32
Figure 5-29. Apply RTV Under Edges
of Seal
CAUTION
Signature Edition

Apply RTV to
void areas
Apply RTV to under-
edges of seal
5-33
(Continued)
5.2.16 Removing Keypad Assembly
Remove the keypad only if it is defective.
Removing a good keypad will ruin it.
1. Take a corner of keypad and peel it away
from front case.
2. Remove any remaining residue from
surface before applying new keypad.
During Reassembly:
1. Fold back a small portion of protective
backing along right side of keypad.
2. Insert keypad flex cables into slot and
guide them through.
3. Align right edge of keypad and affix.
Once aligned, position keypad and
remove remaining protective backing.
4. Press around perimeter of keypad to
assure adhesion to front case and
prevention of fluid ingress.
5. Remove any protective covering from
front of keypad.
CAUTION
Signature Edition

(Continued)
5.2.17 Routing and Connecting Cables
(Figures 5-30a through 5-31)
NOTE: Cable routing may change over time
to ensure wires are not pinched and ease of
assembly and disassembly is maintained. If
the cable routing is different when the
instrument is opened, follow that cable
routing scheme.
Front Case
1. Ensure main board and mechanism are
installed. Route ground wires through
cable clamps, if present, and connect to
transducer.
2. Route transducer cable (blue) under
motor assembly out left side for CH A
(dual) and out right side for CH B
(single). Bend wire up and lay along
mechanism frame. Connect to main
board.
3. Route channel AAIL transmitter wire
(white) up over motor and install tie wrap
#5 with motor wires for CH A. Connect to
main board.
4. Route CH AAIL receiver cable (black) out
to left side of mechanism. Route CH B
AIL transmitter cable (white) to right of
mechanism. Connect both to main board.
5. Route CH A rotation sensor cable out to
right side and over back 4-bar
(mechanism). Connect to main board.
6. Route CH A latch sensor to left under
back 4-bar. Connect to main board.
7. Connect CH A motor assembly cable to
main board.
8. Install tie #4 around CH A motor, latch,
rotation and AIL transmitter (white) wires.
9. Route CH B AIL receiver cable (black) up
over motor assembly and connect to
main board. Install tie #1 to motor cable
and CH B AIL receiver cable (black).
10. Route CH B rotation sensor cable out to
right side and under back 4-bar
(mechanism). Connect to main board.
11. Route CH B latch sensor to right under
back 4-bar. Connect to main board.
12. Install tie #2 around CH B motor, latch,
rotation and AIL receiver cable (black)
wires.
13. Ensure locking bars are up on flex cable
connectors. Install flex cables for front
panel, LED modules, main LCD, RS-232
board assembly and lower LCD as
needed to main board.
14. Install battery/power cable to main board.
Always perform a Rate Accuracy
Verification after mechanism and board
have been removed and reinstalled, or
cables have been disconnected and
reconnected.
Rear Case
1. If needed, re-hook ground wires to cable
clamps (4 places on dual channel, 2
places on single channel). Reconnect
ground wires from mechanism assembly.
2. Reconnect battery/power cable to main
board.
3. Reconnect fan and speaker cable.
4. Reconnect power supply cable to power
supply board.
5. Reconnect flex cable for RS-232 board
assembly and resecure locking bar.
5-34
WARNING
Signature Edition

5-35
Figure 5-30a. Front Case Cable Routing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Channel B Channel A
Back 4-Bar
LED Flex Cable
Latch Cable
Ground Wires
RS-232 Flex Cable
Lower LCD
Flex Cable
Motor Cable
Tie #1
XDCR Cable
AIL Receiver Cable
Rotation Cable
Tie #2
Motor Cable
Power Supply Board
XDCR Cable
5-36
Figure 5-30b. Front Case Cable Routing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Channel B Channel A
Back 4-Bar
Motor Cable
AIL Receiver Cable
Rotation Cable
Tie #4
Latch Cable
XDCR Cable
Tie #5
Motor Cable
5-37
Figure 5-31. Rear Case Cable Routing
(Continued)
(Continued)
Signature Edition

Power Supply Cable
Clamp (Zip Tie)
Tamper Switch
Cable
Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)
Fan
Speaker
RS-232 Flex
Connector
Cable Clamp
(Ground Lead)
Power Supply
Cable
Battery/Power Cable
5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION
NOTE: Calibration coefficients for the
transducer are stored in the EPROM on the
main board assembly. Once they have been
calibrated, the mechanism and board
assemblies become a matched set.
Replacement of either requires pressure and
rate calibration.
Additional testing and calibration may be
required after certain repairs are completed.
These tests are in addition to the Preventive
Maintenance tests. See Table 5-2, "Level of
Testing Guidelines", for more information.
5.3.1 Power-On Self Test
The power-on self test deals with
determining the proper operating condition
of the fully assembled instrument. The
instrument contains extensive self-testing
software. The self test is a final test.
The self test is initiated each time the
instrument is turned on. The instrument
continually tests itself during operation, as
well. An alarm or error message will appear
if there is a problem.
When turning on the instrument, verify that
the instrument beeps and that all display
segments and LEDs flash. This confirms
that the instrument has performed its self
tests and is operating correctly.
5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check
(Figures 32 through 35)
Parts and Tools Required:
Pen light, or equivalent inspection light
Spring Installation Tool; ALARIS
P/N 144107
or
Spring Installation Tool Kit; ALARIS
P/N 145098 (includes tool and
instructions for use)
Perform a visual check of the mechanism
prior to installing it into the front case. Each
time the instrument is opened, verify the
mechanism springs are properly positioned.
1. Verify all 12 followers are in place and
that mechanism is flush to front case.
2. Rotate latch handle and check for full,
uninterrupted range of motion.
3. Verify seal is correctly in place.
Do not attempt to reinstall springs or
repair a mechanism assembly by any
means not specified in the following
procedure. Springs can be damaged if
improperly installed, which can reduce
rate accuracy or lead to an "uncontrolled
flow" condition.
Repair of a mechanism assembly
requires fixturing not available for field
use. Replace (do not repair) a
mechanism assembly that is found to
have an improperly installed spring after
completing the following procedure.
5-38
WARNINGS
Signature Edition

5-39
5.3 TEST AND CALIBRATION (Continued)
5.3.2 Mechanism Visual Check (Continued)
4. Use an inspection light to visually inspect
each of the 4 spring attachment points on
mechanism assembly (both mechanisms
if a dual channel).
a. Verify each spring is properly installed
onto each clamp arm. If each spring
is properly installed, continue with
next step; otherwise, proceed to
step 6 to replace mechanism
assembly.
b. Verify spring is properly installed onto
motor plate (brown colored part). If
spring is properly installed, continue
with next step; otherwise, proceed to
step 6 to replace mechanism
assembly.
c. Verify whether or not spring is properly
installed onto back guide (white
colored part with a metal insert at
spring attachment). Continue with
next step.
5. Use spring installation tool to ensure
proper installation of spring to back guide
attachment point.
a. Firmly press groove of installation tool
over rib just below spring connection
point on back guide.
b. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c
found it to be properly positioned, and
there is no spring movement when
pressing installation tool in place,
spring connection is acceptable and
inspection is complete.
c. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c
found it to NOT be properly
positioned, and spring snaps into
place with firm pressure, spring
connection is now acceptable and
inspection is complete.
d. If visual inspection of spring in step 4c
found it to NOT be properly
positioned, and it does NOT snap into
place with firm pressure, spring
connection is NOT acceptable.
Continue with step 6, for replacement
and return of mechanism assembly.
6. If, after inspecting mechanism spring
connections per steps 4 and 5, it has
been determined that mechanism needs
replacement:
a. Replace mechanism assembly.
b. Return mechanism to ALARIS Medical
Systems (refer to General Contact
Information at beginning of this
manual).
Signature Edition

5-40
Figure 5-33. Mechanism Assembly
Spring Location: Between back guide
and clamp arm (Partial sketched view of
mechanism, for spring location reference only.)
Spring Location: Between motor plate
and clamp arm (Partial sketched view of
mechanism, for spring location reference only.)
Signature Edition

Spring connection to motor plate
Spring connection to clamp arm
(see exploded views below)
Back 4-Bar
Exploded Views
(spring connection to clamp arm)
Correct installation
Incorrect installation
Incorrect installation Correct installation
Exploded Views
(spring connection to clamp arm)
Back 4-Bar
Spring connection to clamp arm
(see exploded views below)
Spring connection to back guide
5-41
Figure 5-35. Spring Installation Tool
Position (Partial view of mechanism assembly,
for spring location reference only.)
The spring installation tool is for use only at
the spring attachment to the back guide.
CAUTION
Figure 5-34. Detail of Proper
Mechanism Spring Position
Signature Edition

Spring connection to Back Guide
Spring connection to Clamp Arms and Motor Plate
Incorrect
spring position
Correct spring
position
Incorrect
spring
position
Correct spring
position
Spring Installation Tool
(keep tool square to
mechanism)
Part of back guide
(white with metal
insert)
Use firm
pressure
to seat
spring
5.3.3 Mechanical Leak Test (Figure 5-36)
1. Use a variable pressure air source
(squeeze ball or equivalent), reservoir,
and pressure gauge. Install non-check
valve set (72013) into instrument.
NOTE: No fluid in set for mechanical leak
test.
2. Cut off drip chamber of set, if needed, to
place into a fluid container filled with
water.
3. Install set in instrument and close latch.
4. Connect variable pressure air source,
reservoir, and pressure meter to set at
bottom of instrument.
5. Apply pressure of 15 + 1 psi (775 + 50
mmHg) for 1 minute.
6. Verify air bubbles do not continue to
show up in fluid container.
NOTE: When air pressure is first applied,
a few bubbles are acceptable during
mechanical leak test.
7. If bubbles continue to show in fluid
container, return instrument to factory or
replace mechanism or case, as needed.
5-42
PSI
mmHg
0 775
Figure 5-36. Leak Test Setup
Signature Edition

Pressure
Gauge
Instrument
Stand
Reservoir
Air Pressure Source
15 psi (775 mmHg)
5-43
5.3.4 Pressure Verification and Calibration
Test
Refer to Pressure Calibration section in
Preventive Maintenance Chapter for soft
cal procedure.
5.3.5 Set Sensor Check
1. Enter Diagnostic Mode and advance to
D6 page.
2. Install set and allow a 30-minute warm-
up while in Diagnostic Mode.
3. Sensor reading with set in should be
greater than 170 mmHg
4. Remove set and close latch. Sensor
reading with set out should be -80 to
+30 mmHg. If not, perform soft pressure
calibration detailed in Troubleshooting
chapter.
Signature Edition

5.3.6 Test Run Mode (Figure 5-37)
The test run mode enables the instrument to
run without fluid after being repaired. To run
the instrument without fluid, perform the
following:
1. Cut AccuSlide
Flow Regulator segment

out of standard set. Leave 2 inches of
tubing at top and bottom.
2. Cut membrane on backside of
AccuSlide
Flow Regulator clamp at

bottom of pumping segment. Use knife
or other appropriate tool and cut an 'X'
into membrane to relieve pressure that
will build up during testing.
3. Move AccuSlide
Flow Regulator clamp

up to open position.
4. Fill lower portion of tubing with RTV. Do
not let RTV enter dome area.
5. Allow to dry (48 hours). Move
AccuSlide
Flow Regulator clamp down

until it "clicks" into closed position, and
install test set into instrument.
6. Select rate and run for desired time
period, for example 100 mL/h for 15
minutes.
7. Remove test set.
5-44
Figure 5-37. Run-In Set
Signature Edition

AccuSlide
Flow
Regulator
clamp (open)
AccuSlide
Flow
Regulator clamp
(closed)
2 Segment
2 Segment
of RTV
Place X cut here
(on backside)
Dome (on
backside)
5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure
NOTE: When performing the Hard Pressure
Calibration, take care not to press downward
on the transducer. The pot is a one-turn,
surface-mount pot with a rivet in the middle.
Use a small screwdriver or scribe to push
sideways on the two slots in the pot. If the
Count = value is 0 or 4095, this could
indicate a bad transducer and necessitate
replacement of the mechanism.
1. Ensure warm-up of 1 hour minimum.
2. Leave instrument on and connected to
AC power and battery.
3. Follow procedure to disassemble
instrument.
NOTE: There is one case screw inside the
battery compartment.
4. Do not disconnect any cables. Adjust
pole clamp so knob is facing downward.
Lay front case on desk/bench top.
5. Locate pot under motor and on backside
of transducer (Figure 5-38).
6. Evaluate sensor in D6 Pressure
Calibration page (see Troubleshooting
chapter), as follows:
a. Press lower left soft key 4 times to see
Count = value.
b. If Count = value is between 875 and
1275, go to start of Pressure Cal
screen. Verify Sensor = reading is
between -80 and +30 mmHg after set
is removed (repeat for other channel if
necessary). If not, perform soft
pressure calibration.
c. If Count = value is less than 875 or
more than 1275, perform hard cal for
this channel.
7. Adjust transducer pot for a Count = value
of 117525 counts.
8. Once transducer is adjusted for proper
reading, press ok to accept value.
9. Close instrument by setting bottom of
front case onto rear case, using case
bosses for alignment. For a dual channel
instrument, route long ground wire into
corner of case boss. Ensure ground
wires do not rub against mechanism.
10. Check for proper routing of cables.
11. Close case by following pattern and
tightening procedure outlined earlier in
this chapter.
12. Wait 30 minutes for transducer to warm
up again and check that compensated
value is still in range, as noted earlier.
13. Perform soft pressure cal procedure
(after 30-minute warm-up) as follows:
a. Install 70ISS Press Cal Set.
5-45
Figure 5-38. Transducer Pot
Signature Edition

Motor
Transducer
POT
5-46
5.3.7 Hard Pressure Cal Procedure
(Continued)
b. Advance to D6 page in diagnostics
mode. Select Cal Pressure for
desired channel.
c. Press soft key next to 0 mmHg. Verify
display reads Pass to right of 0 mmHg
value and Fail for 500 mmHg, and
Complete Press Cal now replaces
Sensor = reading.
d. Attach pressure meter and squeeze
ball to end of pressure cal set. Apply
5002 mmHg.
e. Press soft key next to 500 mmHg.
Verify both 0 and 500 values now say
pass.
f. Press ok to accept. Soft Cal is now
complete.
5.3.8 Checking Pressure Calibration Set
1. Go to Diagnostics Mode, D6 page, to
access Pressure Calibration section.
2. Note sensor reading.
3. Install pressure calibration set.
4. If sensor reading has had a greater than
+20 count shift, or pressure calibration
leaks, replace set.
5.
Signature Edition

5.4 LEVEL OF TESTING GUIDELINES
Table 5.2. Level of Testing Guidelines
This table provides minimum test requirements. If instrument operation is at all doubtful, perform
a complete Preventive Maintenance Inspection.
NOTE: The number in parentheses is the chapter that describes the test/action.
5-47
Tests to Perform
= Required
X = Recommended
A/R = As Required
N/A = Not Applicable
Blank = Optional
Repair/Replacement of
Battery

Case
X X X
Keyboard Assy.
X
LCD Module, Lower
X
LCD Module, Main
X
LED Module
X
Main Board
X
A/R
X
Mechanism

A/R
X
Panel Lock Keypad
X
Power Switcher
X
Software
X
A/R
X
Speaker

Other repairs
X
A/R X X
Miscellaneous:
Instrument Dropped
X
New Instrument Checkout
X X X
Rate Accuracy failure
after Rate Cal.
N/A

No Fault Found
(instrument opened)
X X X
No Fault Found
(instrument not opened)
X
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
a
l
T
e
s
t
(
3
)
F
l
o
w
S
t
o
p
T
e
s
t
(
3
)
R
a
t
e
A
c
c
u
r
a
c
y
V
e
r
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
(
3
)
G
r
o
u
n
d
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
L
e
a
k
a
g
e
a
n
d
R
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
T
e
s
t
s
(
3
)
M
a
i
n
L
C
D
T
e
s
t
(
6
)
L
e
a
k
T
e
s
t
(
m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
)
(
5
)
C
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n
P
r
o
c
e
d
u
r
e
(
2
)
C
l
e
a
r
B
a
t
t
e
r
y
T
i
m
e
(
6
)
S
e
t
S
e
n
s
o
r
C
h
e
c
k
(
5
)
(
p
a
r
t
o
f
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
C
a
l
)
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
C
a
l
i
b
r
a
t
i
o
n
(
s
o
f
t
)
(
3
)
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
C
a
l
i
b
r
a
t
i
o
n
(
h
a
r
d
)
(
5
)
P
e
r
f
o
r
m
R
a
t
e
C
a
l
(
3
)
S
e
t
T
i
m
e
,
D
a
t
e
,
I
D
#
(
6
)
S
e
t
P
M
I
n
t
e
r
v
a
l
,
A
u
t
o
Z
e
r
o
(
6
)
T
e
s
t
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
S
e
n
s
o
r
s
(
6
)
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
s
m
V
i
s
u
a
l
C
h
e
c
k
(
c
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
)
(
5
)
M
e
c
h
a
n
i
s
m
V
i
s
u
a
l
C
h
e
c
k
(
s
p
r
i
n
g
s
)
(
5
)
T
e
s
t
R
u
n
M
o
d
e
(
5
)
Signature Edition

Miscellaneous:
5-48
THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Signature Edition

6
T
R
O
U
B
L
E
S
H
O
O
T
I
N
G
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains descriptions of
possible operating errors and technical
problems that may be encountered during
use of the instrument. Refer to this chapter
before attempting to service the Signature
Edition
GOLD Infusion System.

To facilitate troubleshooting, the instrument
will alarm and display prompts that direct
attention to the problem. Alarms that relate
to operating problems are listed in the
GOLD Infusion
System Directions for Use (DFU).
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6-1
Use extreme caution in servicing the
instrument when connected to AC power.
Hazardous voltages are present when AC
power is connected, regardless of the setting
of the power switch.
WARNING
Before disconnecting the battery,
disassembling, troubleshooting or testing the
instrument, record the alarm history. Refer to
Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log)
section of this chapter.
CAUTION
Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide
This table contains information for troubleshooting possible technical problems. The steps in the
Remedy column are listed in the sequence in which the specified actions are to be taken.
Before making a final diagnosis, visually inspect the instrument for damage. Pay particular attention
to the power cord and plug. Verify the instrument is electrically safe by performing the Ground Current
Leakage and Ground Resistance tests (refer to the applicable Signature Edition
GOLD Infusion
System DFU).
PROBLEM REMEDY
Accuracy Verification
Fails
1. Try new 80VCS Rate Cal set and repeat test a second time.
2. Check for mechanical damage and proper loading of administration
sets.
3. Perform Rate Calibration.
4. Replace mechanism.
5. Return to factory.
Air-in-Line 1. Air in set. Remove air or press RESET to move air through line.
2. Change AIL setting.
3. Clean AIL transducer/receiver.
4. Check connector.
5. Replace AIL transmitter.
6. Replace AIL receiver.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-2
PROBLEM REMEDY
Backup Speaker Activated
while handling main PCB
1. Discharge capacitor C146 (C179) by placing jumper across capacitor
terminals.
Batt Refresh A charge/discharge/recharge cycle was initiated. This can occur:
1. When battery is disconnected and reconnected to AC power.
2. By entering 0.0Ah in rated capacity, connecting to AC, then change rated
capacity back to 1.3Ah.
Battery Low
Battery Failed
1. Plug into AC power.
2. Recondition battery with 2 or 3 charge/discharge cycles.
3. Replace battery.
4. Replace main PCB.
Downstream Occlusion 1. Check setup and tubing (kinked, clogged filter, etc.).
2. Check pressure calibration.
Display Problem 1. Check cable connections.
2. Replace LCD/LED module.
FAN is noisy 1. Check cable routing and snap fits.
2. Replace fan.
Hold/Setup Time Exceeded 1. Press Run/Hold to resume operation.
2. Turn off instrument if not in use.
Intermittent Operation 1. Check cable connections to main PCB.
Instrument/Channel
Malfunction
1. Turn instrument/channel off and back on to see if problem clears.
2. Refer to alarm history for fault detected and Table 6-2: Error Messages.
Key Stuck Alarm 1. Turn instrument off and back on to see if problem clears.
2. Replace channel A LCD module.
3. Replace keypad assembly.
Latch Open Alarm 1. Check for proper set installation.
2. Verify latch closed and moves easily back and forth.
3. Verify sensor not loose.
4. Verify connector not loose.
Table 6-1. Technical Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-3
PROBLEM REMEDY
LCD Contrast is Dark or Light 1. Change contrast setting to 80, tilt unit to help view or follow information in
Diagnostics Mode.
2. Replace main LCD.
Mechanical Leak Test Fails 1. Check mechanism for damage and proper mounting into snap fittings.
No Power 1. Wait 15 seconds after connecting to AC power.
2. Check/replace battery.
3. Replace power supply board (AC off line switcher).
4. Replace keypad.
Press Restart In alarm history, this indicates infusion reached occlusion alarm point in
pressure or resistance modes, but cleared within 40 seconds.
Pressure Calibration (Soft)
Fails
1. Check setup and warmup time of at least 30 minutes.
2. Retry with new 70ISS set.
3. Perform pressure calibration (hard).
Pressure Verification Fails 1. Check for damage and proper loading of 70ISS set.
2. Perform pressure calibration (soft).
Program Lost Normal condition if battery disconnected or in a low state of charge.
Reprogram settings and continue operation.
Resis Restart In alarm history, this indicates infusion reached 100% resistance or alarm point,
but cleared within 40 seconds.
Self Check Due 1. Install set, wait one minute and remove set.
2. Check latch sensor for proper operation.
3. Check pressure calibration (soft).
4. Perform Hard Pressure Cal.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-4
PROBLEM REMEDY
Set Out Alarms 1. Try another set.
2. Lower instrument closer to patient level.
3. Perform pressure calibration (soft).
Set Sensor Check Fails 1. Try a second set.
2. Perform pressure verification.
SWAPPL Software error. Turn instrument off and back on. If problem reoccurs, return
instrument to factory or replace main PCB.
SWShutdown Battery voltage reached 10.2 volts, or five minutes elapsed since low battery
alarm, and battery manager told CPU to turn off instrument.
Charge or replace battery as needed.
Switches Inoperative 1. Replace (Channel A) LED Module.
2. Replace keypad.
Upstream Occlusion Alarm 1. Try another set.
2. Raise container higher to patient.
3. Check for downstream occlusion.
4. Check pressure cal (soft).
5. Could be high resistance in catheter, positional IV, etc.
USO Restart In alarm history, this indicates a resistance condition exists making it difficult to
distinguish between upstream and downstream occlusion, but cleared in a few
seconds.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-5
MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY
AIL DETECTOR Air-in-Line detector failed. Broken wire or
loose connection.
1. Clean AIL.
2. Test in diagnostic mode.
3. Replace AIL transmitter or receiver.
BATTERY OPEN Battery Manager reported battery open. 1. Check connector/replace battery cable.
2. Replace battery.
BATTERY SHORT Battery Manager reported battery shorted. 1. Check connector.
2. Replace battery.
BK SPKR CONECT Backup speaker power didnt connect
(start-up).
BK SPKR DISCON Backup speaker power didnt disconnect
(start-up).
BKUP SPKR ERR Backup speaker didnt operate (start-up
and run).
CLOCK SYNC ERR Main CPU and watchdog clocks do not
agree.
CPU TEST FAIL CPU test failed (start-up and run). 1. Replace main PCB.
DATASET CRC Error occurred when software and data set
CRC do not match. Error text message in
event log should read DATASET CRC.
1. Try to reload data set. If this does not
work, data set will need to be recreated.
ECD UNINSTALLED Fault in Flow Sensor interface. 1. Check ECD Board and connections.
EEPROM BAD CRC Unrecoverable EEPROM CRC error. 1. Reconfigure and recalibrate.
EPROM CRC CRC generator output did not equal CRC
value in ROM.
1. Reflash embedded software.
HWCRC GEN CRC generator did not return zero after
last byte.
Table 6-2. Error Messages
The following hardware error messages can be generated by the instrument. These display
messages indicate that the instrument has detected an internal malfunction. Use tables 6-2 and 6-3
to diagnose and correct technical problems. Steps in the Remedy column are listed in the sequence
in which the specified actions are to be taken.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-6
Table 6-2. Error Messages (Continued)
HW MALFUNCTION Battery Manager reported hardware
malfunction.
ILLEGAL RESET Processor reset while running. 1. Replace main PCB.
LATCH ERR Latch sensor failed. 1. Check placement and
connections.
LCD RAM ERROR LCD controller memory didnt match image in
main RAM.
1. Replace LCD module.
LCD TURNED OFF LCD Controller is off. 1. Replace LCD module.
LED CH TEST LED error (start-up). 1. Replace LED module.
LED SEG CHAN LED stuck row detect failure (start-up). Stuck
row (start-up or run). Segment failure (start-up
or run).
1. Replace LED module.
LED SEG INST LED stuck row detect failure (start-up). Stuck
row (start-up or run). Segment failure (start-up
or run).
MOTOR BEHIND Motor didnt step correct number of steps. 1. Check optics.
MOTOR MID Motor too slow for fast bi-rate or too fast for
slow bi-rate.
1. Check optics.
MOTOR SYNC Motor didnt step correct number of steps. 1. Check optics and connections.
2. Check motor screws not loose.
MOTOR TOO FAST Motor running too fast. 1. Check optics.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-7
MOTOR TOO SLOW Motor running too slow or not running. 1. Check optics.
MTR CURR SENSE Motor current sense failed. 1. Replace mechanism.
PM BAD COMMAND Battery manager or SCU error. 1. Replace main PCB.
PM BAD CRC Battery manager or SCU error. 1. Replace main PCB.
PM ERROR Battery manager error (start-up or
shutdown).
PRESSURE CAL REQ Pressure Calibration required. 1. Perform pressure cal (soft).
2. Perform pressure cal (hard).
PRESSURE ERR Pressure sensor test failed. 1. Try another set.
3. Perform pressure cal (soft).
5. Replace mechanism if TC=0 or 4095 (5).
PRI SPEAKER ERR Primary audio failed. 1. Replace speaker and check connections.
2. Check flex cable to main PCB connected.
RAM ADDR BUS Address bus test failed (start and run). 1. Replace main PCB.
RAM CLEARED Recoverable RAM error. All data lost.
Normal occurrence for manually
initiated refresh cycle.
1. Turn power off and back on, should get
program lost message, continue
operation.
RAM COMPARATOR RAM comparator failed to detect a
forced phantom RAM error (start-up
and run).
1. Turn power OFF/ON to reset.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-8
RAM DATA BUS RAM data test (dedicated byte) failed (start-
up and run).
RAM DMA WRITE DMA write to RAM detected (start-up and
run).
RAM PHANTOM RD Phantom RAM didnt compare equal (start-up
and run).
RAM TEST WHOLE Unrecoverable phantom RAM compare error
at start-up.
RATE CAL REQ. Channel requires rate calibration. 1. Perform/Check rate cal (0%).
SCU ERROR Serial control unit error (start-up and shut-
down).
SENSOR RNG ERR Pressure sensor failed during calibration. 1. Replace main PCB.
SPURIOUS INT Spurious interrupt or bad jump. 1. Replace main PCB.
STUCK POWER KEY Power key stuck or held down too long (over
6 seconds).
1. Replace keyboard and front panel
assy.
S/W SHUTDOWN Battery voltage less than 10.2V. 1. Connect to AC power.
2. Replace battery.
Vbackup HIGH VBKUP HIGH over 6.5V. 1. Replace main PCB.
Vbackup LOW VBKUP LOW less then 4.85V. 1. Replace main PCB.
VBRIDGE ERROR Bridge voltage on pressure sensor incorrect. 1. Let instrument warm up for 1 hour.
3. Try another set.
4. Perform pressure cal (soft).
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-9
Vcc HIGH Vcc high. Over 5.469 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
Vcc LOW Vcc Low. Less than 4.632 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
Vref HIGH Vref high. Over 4.240 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
Vref LOW Vref low. Less than 3.964 Volts. 1. Replace main PCB.
WD ALARM Watchdog has fired. 1. Replace main PCB.
WD EARLY ERROR Watchdog didnt fire when stroked early (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
WD FORCE ERROR Watchdog didnt fire when forced (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
WD LATE ERROR Watchdog didnt fire when stroked late(start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
WD MOTOR ON Watchdog couldnt disable motor (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
WD MTR OFF ERROR Watchdog couldnt disable motor (start-up). 1. Replace main PCB.
WD RESET OFF
ERROR
Watchdog power-on test failed. 1. Replace main PCB.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-10
Table 6-3. Battery Manager Error Codes (not in Alarm History)
The following error codes relate to codes displayed in the lower LCD. These codes are not stored in
memory. The steps in the Remedy column are listed in the sequence in which the specified actions
are to be taken.
ERR 1 - ROM CRC Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
ERR 2 - RAM TEST Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
ERR 3 - CPU Battery Manager code failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
ERR 4 - WATCHDOG ONE-SHOT
TIMINGS
Watchdog circuit logic failure. 1. Replace main PCB.
ERR 5 - ON/OFF FLIP-FLOP
WRONG STATE
Cannot set/clear flip-flop
condition.
ERR 6 - CURRENT INTEGRATOR Battery current monitor circuit
bad or system has excess
current draw.
1. Charge battery.
2. Replace battery.
BATT Battery temperature outside
0 - 60C or battery voltage
<10V or >18.8V.
1. Disconnect and reconnect battery
to initiate a refresh cycle.
2. Replace battery.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-11
6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE
The Diagnostic Mode allows a
hospital/facility to manage periodic
preventive maintenance of the instrument
and view the instrument's history. It allows
testing of functions and entry of the
instrument's ID number. For quick
reference, a map of all diagnostic screens is
located at the end of this chapter.
Pressing a soft key at the side of the main
display the first time selects it for editing.
available options. Other features are edited
by means of the numeric keypad.
NOTE: Pressing undo or cancel will undo
any edits made to that page, and stay on the
page. Pressing ok will accept all information
on the page, and return to the menu page.
6.2.1 Entering Diagnostics Mode
on a dual channel instrument).
Though the figures in this procedure depict
a single channel instrument, the procedure
for the dual channel instrument is the same.
Channel-specific items will display "A" or "B"
in upper left corner.
1. Press and hold left-top display soft key.
2. Press and release POWER switch.
Continue to press display soft key until
Diagnostic Mode display appears, then
release.
Page D1 of Diagnostics Mode is
configured.
NOTE: Some 7131/7231 keypads use
symbols instead of words.
Diagnostics Mode
ID No. : 987654321
SW Rev.: 04.08
PM Due : 52 weeks
1
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
SEC PRI
C
PRI
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
ml/hr
RUN
HOLD
?
SEC KVO ?
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-12
5. Use numeric keypad to enter desired
maintenance interval (1 to 52 weeks).
Press enter. Setting PM Interval always
resets PM Due to same value as PM
Interval.
PM Due decrements with calendar time
and is displayed to the nearest week.
Pressing Reset PM Due soft key resets
the PM Due to the displayed PM
Interval.
beginning of D2 page.
6.2 DIAGNOSTICS MODE (Continued)
6.2.2 Setting Preventive Maintenance
Interval
The preventive maintenance reminder is a
message that appears upon start-up,
indicating the maintenance cycle has
elapsed. If the reminder message is
bypassed, the instrument will operate as
normal but the reminder will continue to
appear at start-up until it is reset.
1. Advance to D2 page.
2. Press PM Setup soft key.
3. Press and release PM Reminder soft
key to cycle between On and Off.
4. Press PM Interval soft key.
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
PM Reminder= On
PM Interval = 52 wks
2
A B
OPTIONS
D
PM Due= 52 wks
Reset PM Due
ok undo
PM Reminder= On
2
A B
OPTIONS
D
PM Due= 52 wks
Reset PM Due
ok undo
Signature Edition

Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-13
6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History
(Event Log)
1. From D2 page, press History soft key.
For mode/state changes, first line will
read Misc. Inst. (Miscellaneous
Instruction). Key Inst. will be
displayed to indicate a key/switch
activation. Alarms and errors may be
channel-specific or instrument related,
which will also appear on first line.
Second line will give month, day, year,
hour and minute that entry/event took
place.
Third line will show event/entry that
occurred.
NOTES:
History Log will keep 1500 entries in
memory. Entry 0001 will be most
recent and entry 1500 will be oldest.
No More Events will be displayed if
less than 1500 events are recorded.
Memory will clear when new main
software is installed.
2. To scroll to previous/next event screen
press page soft key. (Events are listed
on a last in, first out basis.)
3. Press return soft key to return to D2
page.
NOTE: If AC and battery power are
disconnected from the instrument, event
history may be lost.
Alarms:
ALL
Errors:
ALL
User Initiated Events:
Alarm Cleared Panel Unlocked
Channel Off Silence On
Channel On Latch Open
Configuration Complete AC Connected
Diagnostic Complete AC Disconnected
Panel Locked
Following is a list of entries and samples of displays.
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-14
6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) (Continued)
Data Entry Events:
Dose (Rate) Calc VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL Dose (Rate) Calc Set to Off
Load (Dose) VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL Load VTBI Set to xxxx.x mL
Primary VTBI Set to Off Secondary VTBI Set to xxx.x mL
Vi Cleared Dose Rate Set to xxxxx uuu
Drug Amount Set to ccccc uuu Diluent Volume Set to xxxx mL
Patient Weight Set to xxxxx uuu Patient Height (DRC) Set to xxx uuu
Set Time Dose Rate Drug Name
Infusion State Change Events:
Dose (Rate) Running at xxx.x mL/h (Multi) Dose Started at xxx.x mL/h
In KVO at xx.x mL/h Loading (Dose) Running at xxx.x mL/h
Multi-Dose Complete On Hold, VI = xxx.x mL
Primary Running at xxx.x mL/h Secondary Running at xxx.x mL/h
(Mult) Step Started at xxx.x mL/h Timer Started, VI = xxxx.x mL
Timer Stopped, VI = xxxx.x mL
Notifications:
Battery refresh Battery Low
Computer Released Memory Erased
Pressure Restart Preventative Maintenance Reminder
Resistance Restart Resistance Alert
Self-Check required Software Shutdown
Upstream Occlusion restart VI = xxxx.x mL (logged every hour while infusing)
Keys Logged:
Audio Left Soft Key 1 Run/Hold A Three
Bottom Soft Key 1 Left Soft Key 2 Run/Hold B Four
Bottom Soft Key 2 Left Soft Key 3 Secondary Five
Bottom Soft Key 3 Left Soft Key 4 Select A Six
Clear On/Off A Select B Seven
Decimal Point On/Off B Silence Eight
Enter Options Split Screen Nine
Hidden Key 1 Panel Lock One Zero
Hidden Key 2 Primary Two
Configuration Events Logged:
Air-inLine Accumulator Enable/Disable Multi-Dose Mode Enable/Disable
Air-in-Line Reset Enable/Disable Multi-Step Mode Enable/Disable
Computer Link Mode Changed Pressure Alarm Fixed/Adjustable
Default Monitoring Option Changed Pressure Display On/Off
Dose Rate Calculator Mode Enable/Disable Resistance Alert On/Off
Dose Rate Drug List Items Changed Resistance Display On/Off
Loading Dose Mode Enable/Disable Trend Graphs Enable/Disable
Manual Baseline Option On/Off VTBI On/Off
Multi-Dose Alert Enable/Disable
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-15
2
0001 Misc. Chan. A
JUN 5, 2001 15:48
CHANNEL OFF
page return
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
0002 Misc. Inst.
JUN 5, 2001 15:48
BATT REFRESH
page return
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
0006 ALARM INST.
JUN 4, 2001 18:27
BATTERY DEPLETED
page return
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
0008 Misc. Inst.
JUN 4, 2001 14:30
AC Unplugged
page return
A B
OPTIONS
D
Display Examples
6.2.3 Viewing Alarm or Event History (Event Log) (Continued)
Guardrails
Safety Software Events:

GR DRUG NAME IS
HARD DOSE LIMIT HIGH
HARD DOSE LIMIT LOW
SOFT DOSE LIMIT HIGH
SOFT DOSE LIMIT LOW
DOSE OVERRIDE YES
DOSE OVERRIDE NO
MAX PATIENT WEIGHT
MAX RATE EVENT
DRUG SELECT-CANCELED
PROFILES OFF
PROFILES ON
EVENT COUNTER RESET
NEW DATASET LOADED
DATASET CLEARED
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-16
6.2.4 Setting Time (and Date)
1. On D2 page, press Set Time soft key.
2. Press Month soft key to highlight. Press
Month soft key as needed to get desired
month.
3. Press Date soft key to highlight. Enter
date on keypad and press Enter.
4. Press Year soft key to highlight. Enter
year on keypad and press Enter.
5. Press Time soft key to highlight hours
(military time, 24 hours) on keypad and
press Enter. If the value for hours is
correct and only minutes are to be
changed, press Time soft key again to
highlight minutes.
Year setting is four digits and will
accept year entries of 2000 and
beyond. Default date and time is
Jan 1, 1970 00:00
Software clock may lose up to 3
minutes per month. Reset time as
part of Preventive Maintenance or
more often, as desired.
When clock is reset for current
date/time, previous logs will not be
adjusted retroactively, but will remain
the same.
Clock will NOT automatically adjust
for time changes, such as, daylight
savings.
beginning of D2 page. Press Undo soft
key to reinstate time/date.
NOTE: Information stored in the Flash
EEPROM will not be lost when Version
4.08 software is flashed into the
instrument. This includes Rate
Calibration, Pressure Calibration, ID
number (serial number), time/date and
PM data.
6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
Date 5
Year 2004
Time 15 hrs 49 min
ok
OPTIONS
D
Undo
A B
Month Jun
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-17
6.2.5 Viewing Battery Status (Continued)
1. On D2 page, press Battery Status soft
key.
Voltage may range from 10V to 18V.
Ampere-hours may range from 0.0
to 3.0.
NOTE: Voltage will flash when updated
by software.
page.
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery
This step is only required if a different type
or different capacity battery is later
approved for use. As long as battery is
NiCad and rated at 1.3 Ah, no action is
required.
NOTE: Battery is rated at 1.8 Ah under ideal
conditions. 1.3 Ah will be entered here to
help compensate for uneven cell capacity
and ensure getting a "low battery alarm" with
30 minutes or more use on battery.
1. On D2 page, press and release Battery
Status soft key.
2. Press and release Rated Capacity soft
key to highlight.
3. Use numeric keypad to enter rated
capacity of new battery. Press Enter.
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
Voltage : 14.4volts
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap : 1.8 AH
ok
OPTIONS
D
Undo
A B
Batt. Mgr. 3.06
2
Voltage : 14.4volts
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap : 1.8 AH
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Batt. Mgr. 3.06
Signature Edition

Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-18
6.2.6 Changing Rated Capacity of Battery
(Continued)
6.2.7 Viewing DC Voltages
2. Press DC Voltages soft key.
page.
6.2.8 Setting ID Number
An ID number may be useful for asset
tracking, maintenance records, etc.
1. On D3 page, press Set. ID Number soft
key.
2. Press bottom-left soft key to highlight.
identification number. Press Enter.
NOTE: The ID Number can be up to 9
digits.
DC Voltages
Set ID Number
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
3
OPTIONS
D
A B
3
ADREF = 4.100 v
VBACKUP= 5.000 v
VCC= 5.000 v
OPTIONS
D
return
A B
DC VOLTAGES
DC Voltages
Set ID Number
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
3
OPTIONS
D
A B
3
Identification
Number =
12345678
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Instrument
2
Voltage : 14.4volts
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap: 1.3 AH
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Batt. Mgr, 3.06
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-19
6.2.8 Setting ID Number (Continued)
NOTE: Information stored in the EEPROM
will not be lost when Version 4.08 software is
flashed into the instrument. This includes
Rate Calibration, Pressure Calibration, ID
number (serial number), time/date and PM
data.
6.2.9 Viewing Battery and Total Run Times
1. On D3 page, press Run Times soft key.
2. Press Clear Battery Time soft key to
clear battery run time. (Total run time will
not clear.)
6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer
The self-check timer is an interval at which
the software checks the pressure sensor
offset drift when it can be determined a set
is not loaded and no other external forces
are being applied to the pressure sensor.
This periodic check ensures the set can be
sensed as it is installed and removed. The
instrument will give instructions to remove
the set before powering down.
1. On D3 page, press Self - Check Timer
soft key.
DC Voltages
Set ID Number
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
3
OPTIONS
D
A B
3
Battery : 20 hrs
Total : 189 hrs
Clear Battery Time
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Run Times
DC Voltages
Set ID Number
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
3
OPTIONS
D
A B
Signature Edition

Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-20
6.2.10 Viewing Self-Check Timer (Continued)
2. Verify interval is set to 12 weeks.
3. Press ok to return to beginning of D3
page.
NOTES:
This setting is factory set (4 to 12 weeks)
and should NOT be changed. This
feature can be enabled/disabled via
Diagnostics Mode on D7 Page.
If a self-check due message appears,
press continue to keep the instrument
running.
The self-check timer is set to 12 weeks.
This is a rolling 12-week interval. To
establish a new 12-week period, remove the
set with the instrument power on and wait
one to two seconds before turning the
power off. Refer to Calibrating Channel
Pressure section for a sample display
showing the number of hours since the last
self-check was performed.
Ensure the instrument is on when the set is
removed, wait one to two seconds, and then
power off. If the instrument is powered off
without following this sequence of steps, it
will not run on the next power up. If the
instrument displays, "Self Check is Due.
Please Eject the Set," this 12-week interval
has elapsed. If that occurs:
1. Turn instrument on and install set.
2. Wait one minute.
3. Remove set and watch screen for a
message that self-check is in progress.
4. When test is done, screen will go back to
parameter page, and instrument
operation can continue as desired.
6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors
2. Press Test A Sensors or Test B
Sensors soft key (dual channel
instrument).
Display reads D4A or D4B
depending on which channel was
selected.
M Flag reads Light or Dark (Dark with
5th cam in).
Latch reads Open or Closed.
AIL reads Air or Fluid.
ECD reads Air, Fluid, Unplugged or
Not Installed.
3
Interval = 12 weeks
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Self-Check
4
Test A Sensors
Cal A Rate
Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-21
6.2.11 Testing Channel Sensors (Continued)
page.
6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration
Information
Use the following procedure to view or
change the Rate Cal # setting.
2. Press Cal A Rate or Cal B Rate soft key,
depending on which channel is to be
viewed.
3. To change Rate Cal # (%), press Rate
soft key two times.
Instrument will beep but display will
not change.
4. Press Cal # soft key to highlight and
select for editing.
5. Change Cal # based on results of
calibration rate run (refer to Rate
Calibration Procedure section in
Preventive Maintenance chapter).
M Flag = Light
AIL = Air
ECD = Not Installed
4
return
Latch = Open
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
4
Test A Sensors
Cal A Rate
Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Rate
Calibration
Cal # = 1.2 %
Rate= 171.9 mcL/rev
4
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
Displayed: Means:
Not
Installed
ECD board assembly
not installed.
Unplugged ECD board assembly
installed. Flow sensor
not connected.
Air ECD board assembly
detects air.
Fluid ECD board assembly
detects fluid.
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-22
6.2.12 Viewing/Changing Rate Calibration
Information (Continued)
6. Press Enter then ok to accept change or
press undo to return to old cal number.
NOTES:
Information stored in the EEPROM will
not be lost when Version 4.08 software
is flashed into the instrument. This
includes Rate calibration, Pressure
Calibration, ID number (serial number),
time/date and PM data.
Once the Rate Cal # is set to 0.0 and
accepted, the instrument will need to
be run for at least 2 seconds before
the Rate Cal # can be changed to a
non-zero value. If not, the instrument
will display Do Rate Accuracy Test at
0%. The instrument will not allow one
non-zero value to be changed to
another non-zero value.
6.2.13 Testing Main LCD
2. Press Test Main LCD soft key.
Test consists of Main LCD alternating
between normal and reverse video
every 2 seconds.
All LEDs also flash on and off at a
2-second rate.
page.
6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD
5
MAIN
LCD
TEST
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Test Main LCD
Test Aux. LCD
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Test Main LCD
Test Aux. LCD
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
undo +/-
Rate
Calibration
Cal # = % 0.0
Rate= 174.0 mcL/rev
4
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-23
6.2.14 Testing Aux (Lower) LCD (Continued)
1. On D5 page, press Test Aux. LCD soft
key.
This tests Lower LCD display, lighting
all display segments.
page.
6.2.15 Testing Switches
1. On D5 page, press Test Switches soft
key.
2. Proceed to press all keys on instrument.
As a key is pressed, key's name will
appear.
Proper functionality of return soft key
is tested only by key performing its
function; for example, returning LCD
to D5 page.
When POWER key is pressed, it will
display Press and hold key to turn
off.
page.
6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast
5
Test Main LCD
Test Aux. LCD
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Switch Pressed =
Left Soft Key 2
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Test Main LCD
Test Aux. LCD
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
MNTR
GOLD
5
AUXILIARY
LCD
TEST
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-24
6.2.16 Changing Main LCD Contrast
(Continued)
1. On D5 page, press Main LCD Contrast
soft key.
2. Press soft key next to contrast number to
highlight.
LCD contrast (contrast range is 1 to 256).
Press Enter.
NOTE: Decreasing number lightens
contrast.
6.2.17 Calibrating Channel Pressure
1. Install a Pressure Cal Set (70ISS) to
apply pressure to each channel. Allow
instrument to warm up for a minimum of
30 minutes while in Diagnostics Mode.
2. On D6 page, press Cal A Pressure or
Cal B Pressure (dual channel).
D6A or D6B will be displayed, depending
on which channel was selected.
undo
Main LCD Contrast =
127
5
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
Cal A Pressure
DAC A Settings
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
page
6
A B
OPTIONS
D
undo
Main LCD Contrast =
127
5
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

Clear Enter
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
.
0
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-25
(Continued)
3. Both "0" and "500" should display a
number and read Pass. Sensor= should
have a value between -80 and +30
(mmHgs), with no set installed. If Xs
appear or sensor reading is out of range,
instrument will require soft pressure
calibration, as follows (for setup,
reference Preventive Maintenance
chapter):
a. Adjust pressure to "0 mmHg" from test
fixture. Press and release
0 mmHg soft key. If readings are in a
valid range, it will display Pass.
b. Apply 500 mmHg (2 mmHg) from
test fixture. Press and release
500 mmHg soft key. If readings are in
a valid range, it will display Pass.
c. Remove 500 mmHg pressure applied
to instrument, then remove set.
d. Press ok soft key to accept calibration
and return to main D6 page.
4. Set sensor check/calibration verification:
a. On D6 page press Cal A Pressure or
Cal B Pressure (dual channel).
b. Verify both 0 mmHg and 500 mmHg
readings display Pass.
c. Install a standard set and close latch.
Verify reading is over 170.
d. Verify Sensor = reading is in -80 to
+30 mmHg range. If instrument will
not soft cal, perform Hard Pressure
Cal Procedure (see Corrective
Maintenance chapter).
NOTE: Information stored in the
EEPROM will not be lost when Version
4.08 software is flashed into the
instrument. This includes Rate
Calibration, Pressure calibration, ID
number (serial number), time/date and
PM data.
5. Additional messages for pressure
calibration include:
COMPLETE PRESS CAL - need to
do both "0" and "500" pressure cal
points.
FAIL 500 LOW/HIGH LIMIT -
pressure reading seen by ADC is out
of range. Retry soft pressure cal,
perform hard cal, replace mechanism
or return to ALARIS Medical Systems
for repair.
FAIL ZERO LOW/HIGH LIMIT -
pressure reading seen by ADC is out
of range. Retry soft pressure cal,
for repair.
FAIL ZERO LOW/HIGH RANGE -
pressure reading is outside relative
limits. Retry soft pressure cal,
for repair.
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Sensor=+001 Pass
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Signature Edition

(Continued)
SENSOR TOO NOISY - electrical
interference is detected in pressure
signal. Retry soft pressure cal,
for repair.
Reference Hard Pressure Cal
Procedure in Corrective
Maintenance chapter.
6. Messages that require an instrument to
be returned to ALARIS Medical Systems
for repair or mechanism replacement are:
FAIL SENSOR GAIN LOW/HIGH
FAIL VBRIDGE LOW/HIGH
XDCR TEST FAIL LOW/HIGH
ZERO RANGE TOO SMALL
7. Additional self-check information may
also be viewed.
a. Press Sensor = soft key.
b. Pass will be displayed. Press soft key
again.
Three numbers will appear on last
line in display window.
Number on left represents number
of times self-check has been
performed since last soft pressure
calibration.
Center number represents zero
pressure reading at time of last
self-check.
Number on right represents
number of hours since last self-
check was performed. If this
exceeds 2016 hours, Self Check is
Due, Please Eject the Set will be
displayed.
c. Press lower left soft key again.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-26
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Offset=-10 mmHg
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
undo
100
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
0374 1136adc 0169h
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Sensor=+001 Pass
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
(Continued)
Offset level will be displayed. This
value is used to help determine when
instrument will go into a SET OUT
alarm. With Auto-Zero feature on
(enabled - automatically through
Diagnostic Mode factory default), level
must be less than 55 mmHg. Offset
level plus Sensor = value (looked at in
step 3) should equal less than 55
mmHg (with no set installed), to
prevent SET OUT alarm.
NOTE: Offset level is updated when
instrument does SELF CHECK on set
eject. This level will be set to zero
when soft pressure calibration is
performed.
d. Press lower left soft key again.
Count number will be displayed. This
number is uncompensated sensor
value in ADC counts and number that
will be used to perform hard pressure
calibration. This number should be
between 875 and 1275 (with no set
installed); if not, a hard pressure
calibration should be performed (see
Hard Pressure Cal Procedure
section in Corrective Maintenance
chapter).
e. Press ok soft key to return to main D6
page or press lower left soft key again
to return to Sensor = value.
6.2.18 DAC Settings
1. On D6 page, press DAC A Settings or
DAC B Settings (dual channel) soft key.
D6A or D6B will be displayed,
depending on which channel was
selected.
NOTE: The display illustrated below is for a
transducer that is not yet available (as of the
date of this manual). The DAC transducer
will automatically perform hard pressure
calibration when soft pressure calibration is
completed. When the new transducer is
available, it will be part of the mechanism
assembly and sensed by the software. Do
not, at the present time, change these
settings.
6-27
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Count=1070
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Cal A Pressure
DAC A Settings
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
page
6
A B
OPTIONS
D
6
D DAC Settings
Target DAC =1100
DAC Mode: DISABLED
A B
OPTIONS
ok
A
Signature Edition

6.2.19 Configuring Pressure System Auto
Zero
1. Press upper left soft key to access Auto
Zero option.
2. Press Auto Zero soft key to highlight
settings. Press Auto Zero soft key again
to change between On and Off.
main D7 page. Press undo to return to
previous setting.
NOTE: The Boot Rev: xxxx refers to the
flash EPROM boot program and cannot
be changed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-28
Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens
Diagnostics Mode
ID No. : 987654321
SW Rev.: 04.08
PM Due : 52 weeks
1
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
PM Setup
History
Set Time
Battery Status
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Diagnostics Mode
Diagnostics
Communications
Active
1
A B
OPTIONS
D
PM Reminder= On
2
A B
OPTIONS
D
PM Due= 52 wks
Reset PM Due
ok undo
Pressure System
page
7
A B
OPTIONS
D
Boot Rev: 01.02
AUTO ZERO = OFF
ok
7
A B
OPTIONS
D
undo
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-29
Figure 6-1. Map of Diagnostic Screens (Continued)
2
0001 Misc. Chan. A
JUN 5, 2001 15:48
CHANNEL OFF
page return
A B
OPTIONS
D
2
Date 5
Year 2004
Time 15 hrs 49 min
ok
OPTIONS
D
Undo
A B
Month Jun
2
Voltage : 14.4volts
Meas Cap : 1.8 AH
Rated Cap: 1.3 AH
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Batt. Mgr, 3.06
DC Voltages
Set ID Number
Run Times
Self-Check Timer
page
3
OPTIONS
D
A B
3
ADREF = 4.100 v
VBACKUP= 5.000 v
VCC= 5.000 v
OPTIONS
D
return
A B
DC VOLTAGES
3
Identification
Number =
12345678
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Instrument
3
Battery : 20 hrs
Total : 189 hrs
Clear Battery Time
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Run Times
3
Interval = 12 weeks
ok
OPTIONS
D
undo
A B
Self-Check
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-30
5
MAIN
LCD
TEST
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
AUXILIARY
LCD
TEST
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Switch Pressed =
Left Soft Key 2
return
A B
OPTIONS
D
undo
Main LCD Contrast =
127
5
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
4
Test A Sensors
Cal A Rate
Test B Sensors
Cal B Rate
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
M Flag = Light
AIL = Air
ECD = Not Installed
4
return
Latch = Open
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Rate
Calibration
Cal # = 1.2 %
Rate= 171.9 mcL/rev
4
ok
A B
OPTIONS
D
5
Test Main LCD
Test Aux. LCD
Test Switches
Main LCD Contrast
page
A B
OPTIONS
D
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-31
Cal A Pressure
DAC A Settings
Cal B Pressure
DAC B Settings
page
6
A B
OPTIONS
D
Calibrate Pressure
500 mmHg=2400 Pass
Sensor=+001 Pass
6
ok
0 mmHg=1175 Pass
A B
OPTIONS
D
A
Pressure System
page
7
A B
OPTIONS
D
Boot Rev: 01.02
AUTO ZERO = OFF
ok
7
A B
OPTIONS
D
undo
Signature Edition

TROUBLESHOOTING
6-32
THI S PAGE
I NTENTI ONALLY
LEFT BLANK
Signature Edition

7
I
L
L
U
S
T
R
A
T
E
D

P
A
R
T
S
B
R
E
A
K
D
O
W
N
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The illustrated parts breakdown for the
instrument is divided into major assemblies
and individual parts.
7.2 ILLUSTRATIONS
The exploded views serve as visual aids for
identifying the parts of each assembly. If a
part/assembly is identified with an item
number (appearing in a bubble), that number
corresponds to the item number on the parts
list. If a part/assembly is not identified with
an item number, it is part of a higher
assembly or kit.
NOTE: Due to instrument changes over time,
components/assemblies illustrated in this
chapter may be different than those in the
instrument being disassembled. If there are
any questions, look for Service Bulletins
related to this chapter or contact ALARIS
Medical Systems, Technical Support.
7.3 PARTS LIST
The parts lists provide the following
information for saleable parts and
assemblies.
ITEM: This number corresponds with item
number in illustration.
PART NUMBER: This is the ALARIS
Medical Systems number, needed when
placing an order. There are two categories
of part numbers, as follows:
Custom built parts all have 1 XXXXX
series part numbers.
Commercially available parts all have
3XXXXX or 8XXXXX series numbers. It
is recommended that such parts be
purchased from ALARIS Medical Systems
whenever possible.
Chapter 7 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
7-1
Signature Edition

7.3 Parts List (Continued)
PART NUMBER (Continued)
When a part number is not provided, that
part is either not sold by ALARIS Medical
Systems or can only be replaced/repaired
by ALARIS Medical Systems authorized
service personnel.
DESCRIPTION: Descriptive information
that may be helpful when placing an order.
QTY: Total number of each item used.
7.4 ORDERING PARTS
Parts can be ordered by writing or calling
ALARIS Medical Systems Customer Service
(refer to General Contact Information page
at the beginning of this manual). When
requesting a part, provide the following
information:
Instrument name and model number.
Instrument software version. Refer to
GOLD
Infusion System Directions for Use (DFU)
for directions on viewing software
version.
Part number.
Part description, as provided in parts list.
For labels, specify required language.
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
7-2
Signature Edition

7-3
Table 7-1. Other Parts
Item Part Number Description* QTY
148023-100 Kit, Flash, S/W, 4.08
148134-100 Kit , Flash, S/W, 2.78
133450 Learn/Teach Cable 1
136111 Nurse Call Cable (7130X, 7230X only) A/R
301044 Tie Strap A/R
70ISS Pressure Cal Set A/R
80VCS Rate Calibration Set A/R
145096 Kit , Flow Sensor / ECD, 713X
145097 Kit , Flow Sensor / ECD, 723X
145094 Kit , Flow Sensor / Handle Cap, 7131 / 7130
145095 Kit , Flow Sensor / Handle Cap, 7231 / 7230
NOTE: If model is not specified, the part can be used on all versions.
* 7130X =7130B, 7130D, 7130E 120V Version; 7131X =7131A, 7131B 220V Version;
7230X =7230B, 7230D, 7230E 120V Version.
Signature Edition

7-4
Table 7-2. Case Assembly
Item Part Number Description QTY
090 141788 Battery Pack, Conditioned 1
250 141496-100 Case Front, Single Channel (order keypad, labels and feet separately)
141498-100 Case Front, Dual Channel (order keypad, labels and feet separately)
300 144375 Case Rear, Assy Single Channel (7130) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144126 Case Rear, Assy Single Channel (7131) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144376 Case Rear, Assy Dual Channel (7230) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
144127 Case Rear, Assy Dual Channel (7231) (order keypad, labels and feet
separately)
305 141717 Screen Handle, Single Channel 2
141689 Screen Handle, Dual Channel
399 142578 Single Channel Case Seal 1
142579 Dual Channel Case Seal
403 147949-100 Kit, Power Cord Wrap 1
406* 320919 M3 x 10mm Phillips Flat Head Screw 1
409* 980-1015-1 Power Cord Wrap 1
410* 809061 Eyelet Stud Snap 1
413 136777 Battery Door 1
414 140444-000 Power Cord Holder (7131 / 7231 only) 1
420 148450-100 Power Cord Kit (7130, 7230 comes with holder) 1
134745 Power Cord, EUR (7131X / 7231X, 220V)
134748 Power Cord, UK (7131X / 7231X, 220V)
435 136761 Handle Cap, Single Channel without Flow Sensor Holder 1
136762 Handle Cap, Dual Channel without Flow Sensor Holder
141104 Handle Cap, Single Channel with Flow Sensor Holder
141105 Handle Cap, Dual Channel with Flow Sensor Holder
437 140718 Cover, Conn, Flow Sensor, SE A/R
463 305237 Screw, Mach, M3 x 10mm, PH 3
464 305235 Screw, Mach, M3 x 16mm, PH 1
* Included in item 403 - Power Cord Wrap Kit.
Signature Edition

7-5
Figure 7-1. Power Cord Wrap Kit (Item 403)
Signature Edition

410
409
406
7-6
Figure 7-2a. Case Assembly, Single Channel
Signature Edition

90
435
464
300
305
399
250
2 PL
7 PL
437
463
414
413
403
420
7-7
Figure 7-2b. Case Assembly, Dual Channel
Signature Edition

250
399
305
300
435
464
90
413
2 PL
7 PL
437
463
414
420
2 PL
403
7-8
Table 7-3. Front Case Assembly
040 143251-001 Keypad, Main, 7130 1
143252-001 Keypad, Main, 7230
143255-001 Keypad, Main, ENG, 7131
143256-001 Keypad, Main, ENG, 7231
143253-001 Keypad, Main, Global, Symbols only, 7131
143254-001 Keypad, Main, Global, Symbols only, 7231 2
146618-002 Keypad, Main, UK, Primary only, 7131
146619-002 Keypad, Main, UK, Primary only, 7231 1
055 144308 Single Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7130B
144128 Single Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7131A 1
147941-100 Single Channel Board Assembly 4.06, 7130D 1
147941-101 Single Channel Board Assembly 4.08, 7130E, 7131B 1
144307 Dual Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7230B 1
144129 Dual Channel Board Assembly 2.78, 7230A
147942-100 Dual Channel Board Assembly 4.06, 7230D
147942-101 Dual Channel Board Assembly 4.08, 7230E, 7231B 1
070 142850 LCD Module, Graphic 1
080 142475 LCD Module, Lower 1
100 141004 LED Module 1
201 141468 Mechanism Assembly 1 or 2
250 141496-100 Case, Front, Single Channel (order keypad, label and feet separately) 1
141498-100 Case Kit, Front, Dual Channel (order keypad, label and feet separately)
416 305318 Rubber Feet 2
463 305237 Screw, Mach, M3 x 10mm, PNH 1
Signature Edition

7-9
Figure 7-3a. Front Case Assembly, Single Channel
Signature Edition

416
201
463
100
250
0400
0700
0800
0550
2 PL
7-10
Figure 7-3b. Front Case Assembly, Dual Channel
Signature Edition

463
250
0400
201
100
416
2 PL
2 PL
2 PL
0700
0800
0550
7-11
Table 7-4. Mechanism Assembly
147507-100 AIL Repair Kit (kit includes AIL Button, AIL Arm and installation instructions)
203 136836 AIL Button (Receiver) 1
204 141734-100 AIL Arm (Transmitter) 1
383 136255 Mechanism Seal 1
392 141144 Transducer Cable 1
397 133228 AIL Spring
404 136721 Seal Clip 1
405 136656-000 AIL Gear
Signature Edition

204
383
405
392
404
203
397
White Lead
Black Lead
Note black lead threads
through faceplate hook
7-12
Table 7-5. Rear Case Assembly
035 142858 RS-232 Board Assembly with Nurse Call (7130X/7230X) 1
145062 Isolated RS-232 Board Assembly (7131X/7231X) 1
041 144378 ECD Board (Discriminator Board)
(7131X/7231X and 7130X/7230X with Flow Sensor Kit added)
050 140077-000 Panel Lock Keypad 1
060 141371 Power Supply/AC Off-Line Switcher 1
061 139930 Battery Cable Interface 1
140 303106 Clip, Cord 2
300 144375 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7130) 1
144126 Rear Case Assembly, Service (7131) 1
365 141369 Ground Wire, Mechanism 1
386 143320 Insulator, RS-232 (7131/7231) 1
401 141117 Speaker Assembly 1
408 141865 Fan 1
416 305318 Rubber Feet 2
417 305417 Washer, Flat 2
423 303745 Connector, PEC (7131X/7231X) 1
424 305572 Washer, Lock, 1/4 (7131X/7231X) 1
427 305316 Lock Washer (RS-232) 2
430 146008-100 Line Filter 1
437 140718 Cover, Flow Sensor Connector A/R
461 305234 Fastener, Speed Nut 2
462 305239 Standoff, The, Hex (RS-232) 2
463 305237 Screw, Mach. M3 x 10mm, PH 2
465 305236 Screw, Mach. M3 x 10mm, HXSO 4
466 305501 Screw, TPG, 6-32 x 5/16 2
469 305531 Washer, Internal Tooth (use if line filter lug does not have a washer built in) 1
477 305526 Cable Clamp 1
479 303655 Screw, Hx40, 5/16 (for ECD Board) 1
Signature Edition

7-13
Figure 7-5a. Rear Case Assembly, Single Channel
Signature Edition

466
0610
0600
0350
0500
479
140
386
365
466
469
300
401
416
477
417
408
461
423
424
465
437
430
463
462
427
0410
Optional
2 PL
2 PL
2 PL
2 PL
2 PL
2 PL
4 PL
2 PL
7-14
Figure 7-5b. Rear Case Assembly, Dual Channel
Signature Edition

0610
0600
417
461
2 PL
2 PL
0500
300
465
437 4 PL
462
427
2 PL
2 PL
423
424
430
463
2 PL
365
466
469
466
0350
386
0410
Optional
479
416
2 PL
401
408
140 2 PL
477
7-15
Table 7-6. Pole Clamp Assembly
147950-100 Battery Pole Clamp and Knob Kit (includes all items below) 1
421 144334 C-Clamp Assembly Kit (new version)
Kit consists of Pole Clamp, Retaining Ring and Washer
1
425 140408-000 Pole Clamp Lock 1
426 142793-000 Pole Clamp Knob w/Lead Screw (newer version) 1
428 305317 Wave Washer 1
431 139900 Pole Clamp Tip 1
432 305414 Spiral Roll Pin, .078X.3125,SS 1
471 305436 Compression Spring 1
483 320154 Retaining Ring 1
484 320155 Flat Washer 1
426 140380 Pole Clamp Knob (older version) 1
When replacing: Order:
Old version brass lead screw Brass knob lead screw, P/N: 140380 (limited to existing inventory)
New version steel lead screw Steel knob lead screw, P/N: 142793-000
Old C-clamp (no sleeve) Pole clamp and knob kit, P/N: 147950-100
New C-clamp (silver sleeve) C-clamp kit, P/N: 144334
Signature Edition

7-16
Figure 7-6. Pole Clamp Assembly
Signature Edition

484
471
426
425
426
431
421
432
483
428
Shown for reference only
432
7-17
Table 7-7. Label/Literature
603 125569 Label, Serial Number Replacement 1
604 UL Label
605 CSA Label
606 147167-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7130 1
142847-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7230
142848 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7131
147166-000 Label, Name Rating, ENG, 7231
145075 Label, Name Rating, SPAN, 7131
145077 Label, Name Rating, ITAL, 7131
145079 Label, Name Rating, SWED, 7131
145083 Label, Name Rating, SPAN, 7231
145085 Label, Name Rating, ITAL, 7231
145087 Label, Name Rating, SWED, 7231
145081 Label, Name Rating, FREN, 7131
145089 Label, Name Rating, FREN, 7231
607 145827 Directions for Use, English version 2.78, 7130B, 7230B
143243 Directions for Use, English version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A
144790 Directions for Use, English version 2.78 International with Symbols
7131AX02EE, 7231AX02EE
147859-103 Directions for Use, English version 4.06/4.08 Guardrails Compatible
7130D/E, 7230D/E, 7131B, 7230B
147860-103 Directions for Use, English version 4.06/4.08 with Guardrails
7130D/E, 7230D/E, 7131B, 7230B
144793 Directions for Use, Swedish version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A
144795 Directions for Use, Spanish version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A
144797 Directions for Use, Italian version 2.78, 7131A, 7231A
Signature Edition

7-18
Table 7-7. Label/Literature (Continued)
608 140676 Label , Start-up, No symbols, English, 713X/723X 1
141541 Label , Start-up, French/Canadian, 7130/7230
141701 Label , Start-up, French, 7X31
141702 Label , Start-up, Spanish, 7X31
147171-000 Label , Start-up, Swedish, 7X31
147183-000 Label , Start-up, Italian, 7X31
610 140296 Label, Flow Sensor A 1
611 140297 Label, Flow Sensor B (7230) 1
613 123273 Ground Symbol Label 1
623 142844-000 Patent Label 1
625 146136 Label, Cleaning, Warning, English
626 Label, CE Mark
627 133318 Label, PE Connector (7131X/7231X) 1
630 142173 Label, RS-232 Warning, Spanish, 7X31 1
142961 Label, RS-232 Warning, English, 7X3X
143172 Label, RS-232 Warning, French, 7X31
143174 Label, RS-232 Warning, Swedish, 7X3X
143176 Label, RS-232 Warning, Italian, 7X31
654 QC Seal
Table 7-8. Packing Materials
707 142694 Packing Material (713X)
142695 Packing Material (723X)
Labels not sold. Placed on instrument at ALARIS Medical Systems only.
Signature Edition

7-19
Figure 7-7. Label/Literature Locations
Section A-A
(Some items not shown for clarity)
A
A
613
(Ground post)
603
605
626
608
627
604
623
654
630
606
625
610
611
Signature Edition

7-20
THI S PAGE
I NTE NTI ONALLY
LE F T BLANK
Signature Edition

ALARIS
, ALARIS Medical Systems
, AccuSlide
, Dynamic Monitoring
, Guardrails
, and Signature Edition
are trademarks and registered

trademarks of ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.
All other trademarks belong to their respective owners.
Patents, Brevet, Brevets, Brevetti, , Patente, Patenten, Patenter, Patentes, Patentit, , :
AU 686942. CA 78,376; 78,377; 78,378; 2,029,267; 2,125,693; 2,175,021; 2,199,156; 2,199,157; 2,199,160; 2,199,405; 2,199,631;
2,233,640. CH +122,210; +122,211; +122,212. DE M9501995.2; M9501996.0; M9501997.9; P3778211.808; P69004833.5-08;
P690244923; 69329774; 69402231T3; 69624982.0-08. DK - 0649316. EP248,632 (CH, FR, UK). EP387,724 (FR, SE, UK). EP431,310
(FR, UK). EP612,004 (FR, UK). EP748,635 (AT, BE, CH, DK, FI, FR, GR, IE, IT, LU, MC, NL, PT, SE, UK). ES - 2154651. FR 951,426;
951,427; 951,428. HK 1006005; 1006006; 1006041. JP 1,003,444; 1,003,445; 1,006,528; 1,924,062; 2,553,557; 2,802,171; 3,025,018;
3,025,019; 3,064,014; 7502.678. NZ 286445. SG - 49695. UK 2,045,812; 2,045,813; 2,045,814. US 4,898,576; 5,087,245;
5,096,385; 5,360,413; 5,534,691; 5,537,853; 5,542,826; 5,563,347; 5,568,912; 5,575,632; 5,601,420; 5,603,613; 5,609,576; 5,676,346;
5,681,285; 5,699,821; 5,712,795; 5,716,194; 5,719,761; 5,781,442; 5,803,917; 5,827,223; 6,211,642; 6,269,340; 6,358,225; D367,527;
D367,528; D371,194; RE35,841. Other Patents Pending
aT VT
10010812 1997, 2004 ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
ALARIS Medical Systems, Inc.
10221 Wateridge Circle
San Diego, California 92121 U.S.A.
Mail:
P.O. Box 85335
San Diego, California 92186-5335
U.S.A.
Authorized EU Representative
ALARIS Medical UK Ltd.
The Crescent, Jays Close
Basingstoke, Hampshire
RG22 4BS, UK

Alaris Signature Gold - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alaris Signature Gold - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alaris Signature Gold - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Technical Service Manual

GOLD Infusion System

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

System (DMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2A-10

System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B-11

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion Systems, with software

GOLD Infusion System Directions

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System DFU for complete

Safety Software data

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

72 Series administration sets. All

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System DFU for

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

System is that the

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System DFU.

GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System DFU for

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Safety Software compatible and the

Safety Software profile

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

Safety Software drug selection

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

System, a versatile intravenous site

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231

GOLD Infusion System, Models 7130/7131 and 7230/7231